Maserati - Quattroporte - Owners Manua - 2015 - 2015

Owner’s manual QUATTROPORTE Owner's Manual Dear Customer, Thank you for choosing a Maserati. This vehicle represents the result of Maserati's great experience in the design and production of sports, touring and racing vehicles. The purpose of this manual is to provide an understanding of the equipment, systems and controls of the vehicle and how they work. With this manual you will acquaint yourself with the equipment and options of your Maserati in order to take advantage of its full potential. Before driving your vehicle for the first time we suggest reviewing the Quick Guide in order to become familiar with the commands and functions of your Quattroporte. The Owner's Manual, the Maserati Touch Control and the Rear Seat Entertainment (optional equipment) guide can also be viewed via DVD directly from the display screen or PC. In additional to these, on the DVD you can find the “Other Documentation” folder with a pdf copy of the certifications and other documents. In a dedicated section of this manual you will also find instructions for basic maintenance procedures, in order to ensure optimal levels of performance, quality and safe driving. Keep in mind that proper maintenance is an essential factor to help preserve the value of the vehicle over time and protect the environment. For “Scheduled Maintenance” or any other questions, please contact your Authorized Maserati Dealer: Our trained technical staff is constantly providing the latest updates in order to ensure your vehicle is serviced properly. The Quick guide and DVD are integral parts of the vehicle and should always be kept on board. If you are the first owner of this vehicle, you can require a printed copy of the documents available on the DVD directly at an Authorized Maserati Dealer. Maserati is committed to protecting the environment and natural resources; which is why we chose to develop Owner’s documentation in digital format instead of printing paper, thus reducing consumption of materials deriving from wood. 2 3 4 Introduction 1 Before Starting 2 Understanding the Vehicle 3 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 Driving 5 In an Emergency 6 Maintenance and Care 7 Features and Specifications 8 Index 9 5 6 1 – Introduction Consulting the Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Service and Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Suggestions for Obtaining Service for Your Vehicle. . . . 10 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aftermarket Parts & Accessories Statement Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 12 13 13 14 Warnings when driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Maserati Roadside Assistance Program (available for USA and Canada only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Vehicle Identification Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 7 Introduction Consulting the Manual 1 This Owner's Manual illustrates maintenance and useful information related to V8 motorization model, indicated as (V8 Engine), and V6 motorization model, indicated as (V6 Engine). If not otherwise specified, the information is valid for both models. For an easy identification of the topics, this Manual is divided into sections. Within the text, important warnings and notes are easily identified through icons. WARNING! Failure to comply with the instructions could cause HAZARDOUS SITUATIONS involving personal and vehicle safety. ENVIRONMENTAL! This note indicates the best practices when using the vehicle to protect the environment. 8 Abbreviations CAUTION! Aimed at preventing any damage to the vehicle and thus hazards involving the safety of people. Some descriptions and terms with particular meanings are found in this manual in abbreviated form. A/C AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM. NOTE: ABS Additional information regarding the subject and/or the operation described. ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM. ALR AUTOMATIC LOCKING RETRACTOR. ATC AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL. AWD ALL-WHEEL DRIVE. BAS BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM. CAN CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK. DRL DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS. EBD ELECTRONIC BRAKE-FORCE DISTRIBUTION. ECU ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT. EDR EVENT DATA RECORDER. EPB ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE. ESC ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL. ETC ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL. HSA HILL START ASSIST. • “Left” and “right” in this manual, always refer to the driving direction. • All indications and images in this Manual refer to a vehicle with left-hand drive. On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are built differently than shown in the illustrations. • If not otherwise specified, the instrument cluster shown in the images belongs to the V8 model – however the indications given are also valid on V6 model. Introduction HBA HYDRAULIC BRAKE ASSISTANCE. ICE INCREASE CONTROL EFFICIENCY. LATCH LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN. MIL MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT. MTC MASERATI TOUCH CONTROL. OBD ON BOARD DIAGNOSTICS. RAB READY ALERT BRAKING. RBS RAIN BRAKE SUPPORT. RKE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY. RWD REAR-WHEEL DRIVE. SRS SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM. TCS TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM. TFT THIN FILM TRANSISTOR. TPMS TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM. VIN VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER. Updating Service and Warranty Constant improvements are being performed to maintain this vehicle's high level of quality. Therefore, there may be differences between this manual and your vehicle. Maserati reserves the right to carry out design and functional changes and to provide updates or improvements. This Owner's Manual illustrates and describes all versions of the current vehicle model. Therefore, some of the equipment and accessories in this publication may not appear on your vehicle; please only consider the information related to your vehicle. All specifications and illustrations contained in this manual are as of the Manual publishing date. The information provided in this manual is limited to instructions and indications that are strictly required for vehicle use and proper maintenance. By following these instructions carefully, the vehicle will meet the owner's satisfaction and best results. We advise to have all service and inspections completed only by an Authorized Maserati Dealer, where you will find a specially trained staff and the proper equipment to repair your vehicle. Please visit the www.maserati.com to find the nearest Authorized Maserati Dealer. All features and accessories installed on the vehicle have been designed by Maserati engineers and have successfully passed rigorous tests, submitted in all conditions of use. Installing aftermarket components or accessories not approved by Maserati may interfere with the vehicle electronics and compromise driving safety, voiding the warranty coverage. Nor do the warranties cover the costs of repairing damage or conditions caused by any changes to your vehicle NOTE: The updated version of the on-board documentation can also be consulted by accessing the section “SERVICES” on the website www.maserati.com or by using the specific apps developed for the more common Tablet and Smartphone. 1 9 Introduction 1 that do not comply with Maserati’s specifications. An Authorized Maserati Dealer is at your complete disposal for any information and questions you may have. WARNING! CALIFORNIA proposition 65. Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Suggestions for Obtaining Service for Your Vehicle Prepare for the Appointment If warranty work is required, be sure to have the right papers with you and take your warranty folder. Not all work being performed may be covered by the warranty: therefore discuss additional charges with the service manager. It is advisable to keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history, as this can often provide a clue to the current problem. Prepare a List Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the specific work you wish to be performed. If the vehicle has had an accident or work done that is not indicated on the maintenance log, please communicate this to the service advisor. Optimize the Requests If there are a number of items needing attention, it is advisable to discuss this with your service advisor to agree on the order of priorities. At many Authorized Dealers/Service Centers, it is possible to obtain a loaner vehicle or a rental vehicle at a 10 minimal daily charge. If you need a rental vehicle, it is advisable to make these arrangements prior to the visit, for example when you call to set the appointment. Introduction If You Need Assistance The manufacturer/Maserati and its Authorized Dealers/Service Network set highest priority to the client’s satisfaction with the products and services. Warranty service must be performed by an Authorized Maserati Dealer/Service Center. Should there be any issues, please keep in mind that most matters can be resolved with the following process. Contact: MASERATI North America, Inc. 250 Sylvan Avenue Englewood Cliffs NJ 07632 Phone: (201) 816–2600 Warranty Information Please refer to the Warranty booklet, included in the Owner’s documentation kit and on the DVD, for the terms and provisions of Maserati warranties applicable to this vehicle and market. 1 • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, please contact the general manager or owner of the Service Center, it is their responsibility to assist you. • If a Service Center is unable to resolve the issue, you may contact Maserati Customer Center. Any communication to the Maserati Consumer Affairs should include the following information: • Owner’s name and address. • Owner’s telephone number (home and office). • Maserati Service Center name. • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). • Vehicle delivery date and mileage. 11 Introduction 1 Reporting Safety Defects in addition to notifying Maserati North America, Inc. NHTSA’s Toll-free Auto Safety Hotline Transport Canada can be contacted at: 1-800-333-0510 Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500 Fax: 1-819-994-3372 Mailing Address: Transport Canada Road Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z 0A1. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash, injury or death, immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Maserati North America, Inc. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Maserati North America, Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153), go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. Reporting safety defects in Canada If you believe your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada 12 In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ Introduction Parts Service Genuine parts keep the reliability, comfort and performance of your new car unchanged throughout its life. For service and scheduled maintenance Maserati suggests requesting genuine parts since they are the result of constant research, development, and reliability. For the above mentioned reasons and because they are specifically designed for this vehicle, rely on genuine parts. Always ask for genuine parts and make sure they are used for all services. Aftermarket Parts & Accessories Statement Modification of the vehicle or installation of any accessory or components attached to the vehicle which alters the original engineering and/or vehicle operating specifications, or which result in damage to the other original components, electrical interference, electrical short(s), radio static, water leaks and wind noise may result in damage to genuine components, compromise the safety of the vehicle and affect the validity of the new car warranty on the vehicle. Non-genuine Maserati Parts Non-genuine Maserati Parts (while you may elect to use non-genuine Maserati parts for maintenance or repair services), Maserati North America, Inc. is not obligated to pay for repairs that include non-genuine Maserati parts or for any damage resulting from the use of non-genuine parts. Maserati will not accept any liability for any parts and accessories not approved by Maserati, including Dealer-installed accessories not distributed by Maserati North America, Inc. 1 13 Introduction Symbols 1 There are specific colored plates on or near some of the components on your Maserati designed to attract user’s attention. Important warnings concerning all specific devices that the user must consider, are reported on the internal lid cover central label (see “Vehicle Identification Data” in this section). All symbols reported on the plate and inside the vehicle, as well as the component for which the symbols stand, are summarized in the following list. These symbols are divided into categories according to their meaning. Danger Symbols Battery Corrosive liquid. Battery Explosion. Blower May start automatically even with engine off. 14 Coolant expansion reservoir Do not open cap with engine warm. Coil - headlights High voltage. Belts and pulleys Moving parts, keep body and clothing clear. Air-conditioning lines High pressure gas, do not open. Symbols of Prohibitions and Compulsory Measures Battery Keep away from flames. Battery Keep out of children’s reach. Heat guards - belts pulleys - fans Do not touch. Battery Wear eye protection. Battery - jack Refer to the owner manual. Warning Symbols Engine - Engine Oil Filler Cap Engine oil. We recommend using an oil with the characteristics indicated in chapter “Refillings” in Section 8. Hydraulic steering reservoir Power steering fluid. Do not exceed max. level. We recommend using a liquid with the characteristics indicated in chapter “Refillings” in Section 8. Brake fluid reservoir Brake fluid type DOT 4. Do not exceed max. level. We recommend using a fluid with the characteristics indicated in chapter “Refillings” in Section 8. Introduction Radiator coolant expansion reservoir Use antifreeze liquid for radiators. We recommend using a liquid with the characteristics indicated in chapter “Refillings” in Section 8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir Windshield washer. We recommend using a liquid with the characteristics indicated in chapter “Refillings” in Section 8. Warnings when driving Always comply with local traffic regulations wherever you drive. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision. Operating this vehicle at excessive speed or in an altered state or while intoxicated may result in loss of control, going off the road, or overturning. In all these situations a collision with other vehicles or objects is more likely to happen with the risk to cause an accident that may lead to serious injury. In case of an accident, failure to use seat belts causes the driver and passengers a greater risk of injury or death. Use your seat belt at all times. This Owner's Manual contains warnings against operating procedures that could result in a collision, injury or damage to the environment. It also contains cautions against procedures that could damage the vehicle. Important information may be missed for not reading this manual in its entirely. Carefully consider all warnings and cautions. WARNING! • It is the driver’s responsibility to operate the vehicle in a safe way: if you are distracted while driving you can lose control and cause serious accidents. 1 • Maserati strongly recommends you use particular care when operating the features and tools that may distract you. • Mobile phones, PC, portable audio device or other features operated while the vehicle is moving can be very dangerous and can cause serious accidents. • It is very dangerous to send text messages while driving; do so only when the vehicle is not moving. • In some Countries the use of mobile phone when driving is forbidden: it is the driver’s sole responsibility to respect local regulations. 15 Introduction 1 Maserati Roadside Assistance Program (available for USA and Canada only) Welcome to Maserati and the benefits and security of the Maserati Roadside Assistance Program. Please take a moment to review the benefits listed below and available to you through the Maserati Roadside Assistance Program. Emergency Roadside Services In the event you require Roadside Assistance, please call 1-888-371-1802, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. You will be connected with a Roadside Assistance representative who will dispatch a local towing vendor. Information needed for when you call When you call, please be prepared to provide the following information: • Your Name. • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). • Location of your vehicle. • Nature of your call (for example; you require a tow, vehicle will not start, out of gas, tire service, etc.). 16 Summary of Program Benefits and Services • Towing of a disabled registered Maserati vehicle. In the event a registered vehicle becomes disabled in connection to a warranty related concern it will be transported to the nearest Authorized Maserati Dealership. You may request that the vehicle be taken to a different Authorized Maserati Dealer, as long as it is no more than 50 miles further away from the nearest authorized dealer (one tow per disablement). • Battery jump start. • Flat tire change providing the vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. • Fuel delivery (up to 2 gallons). • Lockout Services. • Rental Car allowance: in the event your vehicle is disabled due to a warranty related concern, we will reimburse you up to $50 per day. A five (5) day or $250 maximum applies. In order to receive reimbursement, you must supply the following information within 20 days of the rental car transaction to the address listed below; the original pre-printed rental car receipt, which must include your name, address, telephone number, VIN, rental dates and the corresponding warranty repair order. Maserati Roadside Assistance ATTN: Maserati Rental Car Claims Dept. P.O. Box 8140 Ft. Washington, PA 19034 NOTE: An authorized licensed driver must be driving at the time of the disablement. Items excluded from coverage: • Parts, labor, tire repair, rental of towing equipment, storage fees, or any labor performed at the service facility. • Any form of impound towing, or towing by someone other than a licensed service station or garage. • Assistance from a private citizen. Introduction NOTE: Membership is intended to cover emergencies and is not intended to be a substitute for proper vehicle maintenance or repair. Repeated calls which are considered by Maserati North America, Inc. Signature Motor Club, Inc. or Signature Motor Club of California, Inc. to be excessive may, at our discretion, result in cancellation of the membership. Emergency road service providers are independent contractors and are not employees, agents or representatives of Maserati North America, Inc. Signature Motor Club, Inc. or Signature Motor Club of California, Inc. • NEW VEHICLES: Your membership begins on the date the Registered Vehicle was originally sold (in service date) and continues until the expiration date of the New Car Limited Warranty or unless terminated by Maserati North America, Inc. for cause. • PRE OWNED VEHICLES: Your membership begins on the date the registered vehicle was sold (in service date) and continues until the expiration date of the Maserati Certified Pre-Owned Limited Warranty or unless terminated by Maserati North America, Inc for cause. Address Inquiries to General Inquiries: Maserati Roadside Assistance P.O. Box 968008 Schaumburg, IL 60173 1 Rental Car Reimbursements: Within 20 days of your rental car transaction, the original pre-printed rental car receipt, which must include your name, address, telephone number, VIN, rental dates and the corresponding warranty repair order should be submitted to: Maserati Roadside Assistance ATTN: Maserati Rental Car Claims Dept. P.O. Box 8140 Ft. Washington, PA 19034 Under this Agreement • You will not be required to pay any sum for services up to the mileage limit on towing. • Your registered Maserati vehicle is the vehicle covered. The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) that appears on the vehicle represents your identification number with Signature Motor Club, Inc. or Signature Motor Club of California, Inc. 17 Introduction 1 Vehicle Identification Data Labels Vehicle Identification Number Overview label with cautions and warning notes The vehicle's identification number (VIN) is punched on the foot platform, in front of the passenger front seat. The centrally attached label placed inside the engine lid cover displays cautions, warnings, and symbols. For further information refer to “Symbols” in this section. NOTE: When ordering spare parts or making inquiries, always note the vehicle identification number. To read the number, lift the mat and slide the guard. The VIN Number is also visible from the outside through the windshield on the front left corner of the dashboard. 18 Introduction Passenger Air bag Labels The labels are applied on the external side of passenger's sun visor and behind it, on the dome. Vehicle Emission Control Information Label This label applied on the lower right side of the engine compartment lid shows the Vehicle Emission Control Information (VECI). Tire and Loading Information Label This paper label is applied on the driver's side rear door pillar. 1 NOTE: Vehicle Homologation Label This label applied on the driver's side rear door pillar attests the compliance with safety standards. Paint Identification Label This label is applied onto the trunk lid. For further informations see “Tire Safety Information” in section 5. Fuel Warning Label The label is applied inside the fuel filler door. 19 Introduction 20 2 – Before Starting Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Sentry Key Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Illuminated Entry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Unlock Power Doors and Trunk Lid with Key fob . . . . . 32 Requiring and Setting Additional Key fobs . . . . . . . . . 33 Remote Start System (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . Doors Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Passive Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Sunshades on the Rear Door Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 38 40 43 46 Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Trunk Compartment Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Trunk Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Lid Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Occupant Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air bags Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 51 52 60 67 72 ParkSense Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 ParkView Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 21 Before Starting 2 Keys Keyless Ignition Device This vehicle is equipped with a Remote Keyless Entry transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node, to enter, start and protect the vehicle. This device allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is inside the vehicle. The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has three operating setups indicated on the outer ring. Pressing and releasing the middle button, allows the driver to switch from one setup to the next without starting the engine, the “switched on” indication will turn amber. The engine will start by pushing the center button START/STOP with the brake pedal pressed and the device set in any of the three operating setups. 22 In case the ignition switch does not change by pushing the button, the RKE transmitter (key fob) may have a low or discharged battery. If this occurs it is necessary to replace the battery in order to operate the ignition switch (see “Requiring and Setting Additional Key fobs” in this section). Before Starting It is possible to operate the ignition device using the key fob RKE transmitter with discharged battery by pressing the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob on the START/STOP button. Key fob This vehicle is provided with two programmed key fobs. The key fob contains a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an emergency key that is inserted in to the remote. The emergency key allows you to open the vehicle by inserting into the lock of the opening handle on the driver's door, in case the battery of the vehicle or the key fob go dead. You can keep the emergency when using valet parking. To remove the emergency key: • hold the mechanical latch on the back of the key fob sideways; • simultaneously remove the emergency key by sliding laterally towards the end of the remote control. Shift Ignition Device to OFF Alert Opening the driver's door to exit the vehicle when the ignition device is set in ACC or RUN (engine not running), a beep will remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. The audio sound is followed by a dedicated message displayed on the instrument cluster. With the MTC System, the power window switches, radio, power sunroof, and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature, it is possible to set the timing of this feature. NOTE: NOTE: You can insert either side of the emergency key into the lock cylinder. Refer to “MTC Settings” in Section 4 for further information. 2 WARNING! • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle. (Continued) 23 Before Starting (Continued) • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. 2 • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake switch, brake pedal or the shift lever, causing the vehicle to roll away. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not leave the ignition switch in the ACC or RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. • An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the key fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition switch to OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. 24 Sentry Key® Immobilizer System The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. The system uses a key fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, an ignition switch and a RF (Radio Frequency) receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs expressly programmed can be used to start and operate the vehicle. After placing the ignition in the RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light (see picture) will light up for a three second bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics: this condition will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds. If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (engine running for longer than 10 seconds), an electronic fault is detected. Should this occur, contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as possible for assistance. CAUTION! The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some remote starting systems that can be installed in after-market. Use of remote starting systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection. All key fobs provided with the new vehicle have been updated with the vehicle electronics and are therefore able to guarantee correct functioning and protection. Before Starting General Information Replacement Key fobs This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: NOTE: • This device may not cause harmful interference. • This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Only key fobs that are updated with the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. NOTE: • When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, bring all key fobs provided with the vehicle with you to the Maserati Service Center. • When selling the vehicle, it is necessary to provide the new owner with all key fobs. 2 WARNING! • Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. • Always remember to cycle the ignition switch to OFF. Duplication of key fobs may be performed by an Authorized Maserati Dealer only. This procedure consists of programming a key fob that has never been programmed to the vehicle’s electronics. 25 Before Starting Arming the System Vehicle Security Alarm 2 26 The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors and trunk lid for unauthorized entry and the START/STOP button for unauthorized operations. The system also includes a dual function anti-intrusion sensor and vehicle anti-lift sensor. The anti-intrusion sensor monitors the vehicle interior for motion. The vehicle anti-lift sensor monitors the vehicle for any lifting or tilting actions (tow away, tire removal, ferry transport, etc). A siren with battery backup which senses interruptions of power and communications is also included. While the vehicle security alarm is enabled, interior door locks switches, trunk lid and fuel filler door release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle security alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals: intermittent buzzer, park lights and/or turn signals and the vehicle security light on the dashboard will flash. This light will fast flash for approximately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security alarm is being armed, and will then flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed. Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm. • Make sure the vehicle ignition switch is OFF. • Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle: Rearming the System If something triggers the security alarm, and no quick action is taken to disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn off the beeper after 29 seconds, and turn off all of the visual signals after 31 more seconds; the vehicle security alarm will then rearm itself. • Press the lock button on the interior power door lock switch located on the driver door trim panel with the driver and/or passenger door open. Before Starting To disarm the System Use any of the following steps to disarm the vehicle security alarm. • Press the button on the exterior Passive Entry door handle having a valid key fob RKE transmitter in the same exterior zone (see “Passive Entry System” in this section for further information). • Press the lock button on the key fob RKE transmitter. • If any door is open, close it. In any of these situations, if one or more windows are open, will remain open. To close the windows press again the lock button and hold it until their closure. Each time the vehicle security alarm is armed, the anti-intrusion and anti-lift sensors actively monitor the vehicle. When arming the security alarm, it is possible to disable these sensors by pressing the button on the remote control three times within 5 seconds from the moment the system has been armed (meanwhile the security alarm telltale flashes rapidly). • Press the button on key fob RKE transmitter. • Grasp the Passive Entry unlock door handle (see “Passive Entry System” in this section for further information). • Press the START/STOP button so as to release the OFF position. 2 NOTE: When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior power door lock switch will not allow unlocking of the doors. The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will activate. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm. If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle security 27 Before Starting Illuminated Entry/Exit alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, the buzzer will activate. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm. 2 Using the Panic Alarm To turn the panic alarm feature on or off, press and hold the button on the key fob RKE transmitter for at least one second and release. When the panic alarm is on, the headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the courtesy & dimmable lights will turn on. The panic alarm will remain activated for three minutes unless you turn it off by either: • pressing the button a second time; • or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) or faster. In both situations the panic alarm will immediately turn off. 28 Lights will turn on and off when you enter/exit the vehicle and operate the buttons on the key fob RKE transmitter and/or on the Passive Entry system as follows: Tamper Alert If something has triggered the vehicle security alarm in your absence, the horn will sound three times when you disarm the vehicle security alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering. • If the lock command is enabled by pressing the specific button on the key fob RKE transmitter or by the Passive Entry system, the “illuminated entry” mode will activate. Courtesy & dimmable internal lighting, night front seats lighting, and approach lighting will stay on for 27 seconds. Before Starting • If the lock command of the car is enabled by pressing the specific button on the key fob RKE transmitter or by the Passive Entry system, when the key fob RKE transmitter is moved out of range, all the lights will turn off within 3 seconds, if they were previously on. 2 • If the trunk lid command is enabled by the specific button on the key fob RKE transmitter or by the Passive Entry system, when pressing the trunk lid external button in between the license plate lights, the inner trunk light will turn on and will stay on for 10 minutes before turning off. Light will immediately turn off when closing the lid. 29 Before Starting 2 • If the button is pressed on the key fob RKE transmitter, the headlights, park lights and the courtesy & dimmable lights will turn on. Refer to “Using the Panic Alarm” in this section for further information. 30 Before Starting Vehicle Lighting with Open/Closed Doors Vehicle Headlight Switch Function • If one or more doors are open, the central light, front/rear domelights (main and spot light), the instrument panel, the MTC display and the night front seats lighting and the ignition switch backlight will turn on and remain lit for 27 seconds. • If the doors are closed, all lights will turn off (within 3 seconds) with the exception of the console display and the ignition switch backlight, which will turn off after 27 seconds. Vehicle lighting can be operated from the key fob RKE transmitter, the Passive Entry system and from the headlight switch on the left side of the dashboard (refer to “Lights” in section 3 for further information). • If the headlight switch is in the “0” (OFF) mode all switch backlights and the front seat lighting will turn off. • If the headlight switch is in the position (Park mode) and the ignition switch is in OFF or ACC position, only the front low intensity LEDs of the external headlight will turn on. • If the headlight switch is in position (Park mode) and the ignition switch is in RUN position, no lighting feature will be available. • If the headlight switch is in position (Low beam mode) the front domelight LED (if enabled), the switch backlights, the instrument panel’s display and the night front seats lighting will turn on. The front domelight LED and the night lighting of the front seats will light up with the intensity set by the right-hand regulator. If the regulator is to "0" (OFF) position, the night lighting will turn off. • If the headlight is switched to “AUTO” position (on/off AUTO mode) and the ignition is switched to RUN position, as in “low beam mode”, all lights turn on either in “DAY” or “NIGHT” mode according to the twilight sensor. In “DAY” 2 31 Before Starting mode the switch backlights will be at 100% intensity, in “NIGHT” mode they will be as set by the left dimmer control switch. 2 NOTE: In “DAY” mode, the switches are not backlit, except the windows and steering switches. Light Dimmer Controls The light dimmer controls are part of the headlight switch and are positioned beside the switch itself (see “Lights” in section 3 for further information). Unlock Power Doors and Trunk Lid with Key fob The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and the fuel filler door, open the trunk, turn the approach and courtesy lights on from a distance up to approximately 33 ft (10 m). The key fob RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. See “Illuminated Entry/Exit” in this section for further information. Press and release the unlock button on the key fob RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver's door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and the fuel filler door. The turn signal lights will flash for the unlock signal recognition. The illuminated entry/exit system will also turn on. See “Passive Entry System” in this section for further information. Unlock Driver Door/All Doors with Remote Key 1st Press This feature allows you to program the system to unlock either the driver's door or all doors and the fuel filler door by the first press of the unlock button on the key fob RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, see “MTC Settings” in section 4. NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system from responding to all key fobs RKE transmitter buttons. 32 Unlock the Doors and Fuel Filler Door Lock/Unlock Doors Flash Lights This feature will cause a flash of the turn signal lights when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or off. To change the current setting, see “MTC Settings” in section 4. Before Starting Turn Headlights On with Remote key This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the key fob RKE transmitter. The duration can be set as desired. To change the current setting, see “MTC Settings” in section 4. Locking Doors and Fuel Filler Door Press and release the lock button on the key fob RKE transmitter to lock all doors and the fuel filler door. The turn signal lights will flash for signal recognition. Refer to “Passive Entry System” in this section for further information. Locking Doors Sound Alarm This feature will cause the alarm to activate when the doors are locked with the key fob RKE transmitter. This feature can be enabled or disabled. To change the current setting, see “MTC Settings” in section 4. Steering Lock (for versions/markets, where provided) The vehicle can be equipped with an electric steering lock that is automatically activated when the ignition device is switched to OFF. To check activation, turn the steering wheel until it stops. When the ignition device is switched to RUN, the steering lock automatically deactivates Requiring and Setting Additional Key fobs Provide your Authorized Maserati Dealer the following when ordering additional key fob RKE transmitters: 2 • all key fobs RKE transmitters in your possession; • a personal ID; • the identification and registration documents proving ownership of the vehicle. Setting new key fobs or re-setting the original ones can only be performed at an Authorized Maserati Dealer. NOTE: Codes of any key fob RKE transmitters that are not present when the new setting procedure is done will be deleted from the memory to prevent lost or stolen key fobs transmitters being used to disarm the electronic alarm system. To Unlatch the Trunk Press the button on the key fob RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk. See “Passive Entry System” in this section for further information. 33 Before Starting Key fob Battery Replacement NOTE: 2 • Separate the two lateral covers from the remote control case. • Separate both parts of the remote control case. A low charge level of the key fob battery will be indicated on the instrument cluster display. The recommended replacement battery type is: CR2032. To replace the battery proceed as follows: • Remove the emergency key as indicated in “Keys” chapter of the current section. • Loosen the lateral screw that connects the two side covers with a small screwdriver. 34 • Remove the card with PCB (Printed Circuit Board). Before Starting • Remove the battery from its seat and replace with a new recommended type of battery. certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm. NOTE: Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean with alcohol. ENVIRONMENTAL! Batteries contain dangerous materials that could harm the environment. Please dispose of them according to local regulations or at the Authorized Maserati Dealer. WARNING! CALIFORNIA proposition 65. Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, • Match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. • Replace the printed circuit board by using the indicated pin for the sealing of the two covers. • Assemble the key fob case and reassemble the two lateral covers: a click will indicate successful sealing. • Combine the disassembled parts with clamping screw and reassemble the emergency key. Radio Frequency RKE Transmitter - General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. The current device feature is subject to following conditions: 2 • This device may not cause harmful interference. • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If your key fob RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance, check for these two conditions: • A weak battery in the key fob RKE transmitter. The expected life of the battery in normal use is a minimum of three years. • Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios. 35 Before Starting Remote Start System (optional) 2 This system enables the key fob RKE transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m). Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob may reduce this range. General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference. • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance, check for these conditions: 36 • A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years. • Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radio. • Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob. How to use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start: • System not disabled from previous remote start event. • Vehicle Security alarm not active. • Doors closed. • Engine lid closed. • Trunk lid closed. • Hazard lights switch off. • Brake pedal not pressed by any passenger remaining in the vehicle. • Battery at an acceptable charge level. WARNING! • Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. • Keep key fobs RKE transmitter away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death. Engine Remote Start Abort Message on Instrument Cluster The following messages will display on the instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely: • “Remote Start Cancelled Door Open”. • “Remote Start Cancelled Hood Open”. • “Remote Start Cancelled Trunk Open”. • “Remote Start Cancelled Fuel Low”. • “Remote Start Cancelled Time Expired”. • “Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle to Reset”. The message on the instrument cluster stays active as long as the ignition switch is in RUN position. Before Starting To enter Remote Start Mode NOTE: On the remote control of vehicles with button is this feature, the replaced by the remote start button . Press and release the button on the key fob RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, parking lights will flash and the horn will ring twice (if set). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the “Remote Start” mode for a 15-minute cycle. • The park lamps will turn on and remain lit during “Remote Start” mode. • For security reasons, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the “Remote Start” mode. • The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15-minute cycles) with the key fob RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle. To exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Vehicle Press and release the button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle. NOTE: NOTE: • In case of an engine fault or low fuel level, the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable the one time press of the button for two seconds after receiving a valid “Remote Start” request. To exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the button on the key fob RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the vehicle security alarm. Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, press and release the START/STOP button. 2 NOTE: The message “Push Start Button” will display in the instrument cluster until you push the START/STOP button. Auto-On Comfort with Remote Start The driver's heated and ventilated seat and the heated steering wheel (if equipped) can be programmed to come on during a remote start. Refer to “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start” function in chapter “MTC Setting”, section 4, for further information. 37 Before Starting Doors Locking 2 WARNING! • For personal security and safety in the event of an accident, or robbery lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when parking and leaving the vehicle unattended. Doors Manual Lock To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake trigger, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not leave ignition switch in the ACC or RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or start the engine and the vehicle. 38 Power Doors Locking/ Unlocking A power door lock switch and a power door unlock switch are positioned on the front door trim panel. Use this switches to lock or unlock the doors. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob RKE transmitter and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Therefore, make sure the key fob RKE transmitter is not inside the vehicle before closing the door. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward. If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, the door will lock. Before Starting If the vehicle has been locked from inside with the above figured switches, the fuel filler flap remains unlocked. The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Passive Entry system. For further information, see “Passive Entry System” in this section. If you press the power door lock switch while the ignition switch is in the ACC or RUN position, and any front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the key fob RKE transmitter in the vehicle. Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or closing the door will allow the locks of the doors and fuel filler door to operate. If a door is open with the key fob RKE transmitter inside the cabin and the ignition is in the ACC or RUN position, a beep will draw the driver’s attention. Automatic Door Unlock on Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if: • The automatic unlock doors on exit feature is enabled. • The transmission is in gear and the vehicle speed is 0 mph (km/h). • The transmission is in N (Neutral) or P (Park). • The driver door is open. • The doors were not previously unlocked. • The vehicle speed is 0 mph (km/h). Set Automatic Door Unlock on Exit Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children sitting in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a child-protection door lock system. 2 Engage or Disengage the Child-Protection Door Lock • Open the rear door. • Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and rotate to the lock or unlock position. • Repeat the first two steps on the opposite rear door. To change the current setting, see “MTC Settings” in section 4. NOTE: Use the automatic unlock doors on exit feature in accordance with local regulations. Automatic Locking Doors The auto door lock feature default condition is disabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by an Authorized Maserati Dealer only which can also service the vehicle. 39 Before Starting Passive Entry System 2 WARNING! Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child-protection locks are engaged (locked). NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the child-protection door lock system is engaged, manually raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll down the window, and open the door using the outside door handle. 40 The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to press the key fob RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons. The Passive Entry system upon request can also be extended to the external opening handles of the rear doors. NOTE: • Passive Entry may be programmed to on/off; see “MTC Settings” in section 4 for further information. • If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time. Unlock Door from the Driver Side With a valid key fob RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grip the driver’s door outside handle to unlock the door automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will rise when the door is unlocked. Before Starting NOTE: NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all doors will unlock when you grip the front driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, see “MTC Settings” in section 4. All doors will unlock when you grip the front passenger door handle regardless of the driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”). Unlock Door from the Passenger Side With a valid key fob RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grip the front passenger outside door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will rise when the door is unlocked. Preventing Inadvertent Locking of the Key fob RKE Transmitter inside the Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a key fob RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position. If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors have been closed the system checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid key fobs RKE transmitter. If one of the vehicle's key fobs RKE transmitter is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid key fobs RKE transmitter are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry system automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times (on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the key fob RKE transmitter will be locked in the vehicle). NOTE: The vehicle unlocks the doors under any of the following conditions: 2 • the doors are manually locked using the door lock knob positioned on the door panel; • there is a valid key fob RKE transmitter inside the vehicle; • there is a not valid key fob RKE transmitter outside the vehicle. NOTE: The vehicle will not unlock the doors under any of the following conditions: • the doors are locked using the key fob RKE transmitter; (Continued) 41 Before Starting Manual Door Lock from Outside (Continued) • the doors are locked using the button on the Passive Entry front door handles; With one of the vehicle’s key fobs RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, press the outside door handle button to lock all four doors. 2 NOTE: • there is a valid key fob RKE transmitter outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry front door handle; • three attempts are made to lock the doors using the door panel switch and then close the doors. To enter the Trunk With a valid key fob RKE transmitter within 3 ft (1 m) of the trunk lid, press the button on the lid between the license plate lights. The light inside the trunk will turn on and will stay lit for 10 minutes. The light will immediately turn off if you lock the trunk lid before 10 minutes. 42 NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle's key fob RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the lid it will automatically unlatch, unless another one of the vehicle’s key fob RKE transmitters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1 m) of the trunk lid. • After pressing the outside door handle button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using this door handle. By pulling the outside door handle, you can check if the car remains locked, without Passive Entry system reacting and unlocking the doors. • The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob RKE transmitter battery is dead. Before Starting The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s inner door panel. Power Windows The window controls on the driver's door panel governs all the door windows. 2 There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel, which operate the corresponding window. The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or RUN position. 43 Before Starting NOTE: 2 • The power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time lapse can be set. See “MTC Settings” in section 4 for further information. • Frequent activations of the power windows could result in a temporary lock of their starters. In this case, wait a moment before a new activation. WARNING! Improper use of the power windows and the sunroof can be dangerous, even with the anti-pinch prevention system. Before and during activation of the power window, always check that the passengers are not exposed to the risk of injury both by the moving window and by personal objects that could be dragged or hit by it. Do not leave unattended children in a vehicle with a key fob RKE transmitter inside. When getting out the vehicle, always remove the key fob RKE transmitter to prevent the windows being accidentally activated, 44 posing a risk to passengers remaining onboard. Auto-Down Feature The driver door power window switch has an auto-down feature. Some models feature a passenger auto-down feature as well. Press the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go completely down automatically. To open the window part way, press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop. To stop the window from going all the way down during the auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly. Auto-Up Feature with Anti-Pinch Protection Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go all the way up automatically. To stop the window from going all the way up during the auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly. To close the window part way, lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop. NOTE: • If the window runs into an obstacle during auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window. • Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually. • Frequent activations of the anti-pinch function could disable the auto-down and auto-up function of the windows. In order to re-activate this function proceed with a reset cycle as described in the next paragraph. WARNING! There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the area before closing the window. Before Starting Reset Auto-Up/Down NOTE: Should the auto-up/down feature stop working, the window probably needs to be reset. To reset auto-up/down, pull the window switch up to close the window completely and push the window switch down to open the window completely. If the sunroof was open, it will close completely when performing the above indicated “Closing” procedure. However, if it was closed, when performing the “Opening” procedure it will still remain closed (refer to “Power Sunroof with Sunshade” in Section 3 for further information). Open and Close the Windows with RKE Transmitter and Ignition Off Rear Window and Sunshade Lockout Button When the ignition switch in is OFF position, windows can be opened or closed by pressing the buttons on the RKE transmitter. Opening: • press the button and release it; • press a second time the button and keep it pressed until complete opening of the window. The window lockout button on the driver's door trim panel allows to disable the window control on the rear passenger doors and the rear window sunshade control at the rear of the central console, by pressing the window lockout button (setting it in the down position). To enable the controls previously described, press the window lockout button again (setting it in the up position). Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure or a helicopter-type sound. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof in open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting. 2 Closing: • press the button and release it; • press a second time the button and keep it pressed until complete closure of the window. 45 Before Starting Power Sunshades on the Rear Door Windows sunshade and the door panel, during lowering. NOTE: 2 Operation of the rear windows and related sunshades is done by pressing or pulling the window switch and depends on the position of the windows prior to the command operation. As described for the opening and closing functions of the power windows (see chapter “Power Windows” in this section), the window switch has two functioning modes: press and release the switch to the first detent to partially move the window; press and release the switch to the second detent to move the window all the way up or down. 46 CAUTION! Before activating the sunshade, make sure that no objects can interfere with its travel. • On vehicles provided with power sunshades on the rear windows, the window switches also operate the sunshades. • The rear window lock button also operates the rear power sunshades. • Window and sunshade controls only operate if the ignition switch is in ACC or RUN position. The following images and the subsequent text show the possible starting positions (A, B, C and UP, DOWN) and function of the window and the sunshade, to be independently activated by pressing or lifting the control switch to the first (1) or second (2) detent. Operations WARNING! Rear seat passengers must be careful when operating the sunshades, since there is the risk of being pinched between the top of the sunshade and the headlining, during raising, and between the top edge of the Before Starting A. Sunshade fully unrolled (UP position) and Window closed (UP position) • Pulling the control up to 1 or 2 detent: no action (NOP). 1.1 Pressing the control to 1 detent: the sunshade rolls down completely and the window stay closed. 1.2 Pressing the control again to 1 detent: the window open partially until the control is released and the sunshade stay down (pressing the control to 2 detent: the window opens completely). 2.1 Pressing the control to 2 detent: the sunshade rolls down completely while the window stay closed. 2.2 Pressing the control again to 2 detent: the window opens completely. 2 B. Sunshade fully rolled down (DOWN position) and Window closed (UP position) • Pulling the control up to 1 or 2 detent: the sunshade unrolls completely and the window stay closed. • Pressing the control to 1 or 2 detent: the window opens partially or completely and the sunshade remains rolled. C. Sunshade fully rolled down (DOWN position) and Window completely open (DOWN position) • Pulling the control to 1 or 2 detent: the window closes partially or completely and the sunshade remains rolled. • Pressing the control to 1 or 2 detent: no action (NOP). 47 Before Starting Rear Window Rear Window Defroster 2 The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel. See “Air Conditioning Controls” in section 4. • Within 15 seconds, press the “Rear Sunshade” soft-key to raise the power sunshade. • Within 15 seconds, press the “Rear Sunshade” soft-key a second time to lower the sunshade. seats. This button can be operated by the rear passengers. • Press the button to raise the sunshade. • Press the button a second time to lower the sunshade. Power Rear Sunshade (optional on V6 Engine model) A power sunshade reduces the amount of sunlight entering through the rear window. The sunshade is rolled up and stored inside a cover located behind the rear seats. When this is activated, it rolls out upwards. The power sunshade is operated using the MTC system. • Press the “Controls” soft-key. 48 If the sunshade is the raised position and the gear lever is positioned in R (Reverse), the sunshade will automatically lower. When the gear lever is shifted out of R (Reverse) the sunshade will automatically return to the fully raised position after approximately five seconds. The trigger button of the rear sunshade is positioned at the rear of the central console, or for vehicles equipped with the “Comfort Luxury” rear seats, is located on the rear central console between the two rear “Comfort Luxury” rear seats Before Starting NOTE: The rear sunshade controls, power windows switches together with the sunshades on the rear windows, can be locked by pressing the lockout button indicated on the driver side door panel. Trunk Compartment Operation The trunk lid can be opened from inside the vehicle by pressing the release button on the door trim panel. NOTE: The shift lever must be in P (Park) before the button can operate. to keep the RKE transmitter within 3 ft (1 m) from the trunk lid, with “Passive Entry” function enabled or disabled from the MTC menu. • When the car is locked , to open the trunk lid: 2 • if the “Passive Entry” function has been enabled from the MTC menu, it is necessary to keep the RKE transmitter within 3 ft (1 m) from the trunk lid; • if the “Passive Entry” function has been disabled from the MTC menu, the trunk lid does not open even with the RKE within 3 ft (1 m) from the trunk lid. The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pressing the button on the key fob with RKE transmitter twice within five seconds or by using the external release button located on the lower side of the trunk ledge, between the license plate lights under the following conditions: • When the car is unlocked , to open the trunk lid it is not necessary 49 Before Starting With the ignition device in the OFF position, the trunk open symbol and message will display until closure. 2 To close the trunk lid use the handle as indicated beside the closing mechanism. See “Passive Entry System” in this section for more information on trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature. Trunk Lid Emergency Release With the ignition switch in RUN position, the red symbol will display on the instrument panel with the message indicating that the trunk is open. Once the trunk is closed both symbol and message will disappear from the display. 50 If accessing the trunk from the rear seats, operate the emergency release lever (see the chapter "Trunk Safety" in this section) in order to lower the rear seat backrest (see "Cargo Area" in section 3). If the power release control operated by pressing the button on the door trim panel fails, which may occur when the battery is low on voltage, it is possible to temporarily power the system by using the battery remote poles located inside the engine compartment (see “Auxiliary Jump-Start Procedure” in section 6). Thus it is possible to normally open the trunk lid by using the RKE remote control. Have the vehicle checked by an Authorized Maserati Dealer center in order to solve the failure. Before Starting Trunk Safety Engine Lid Operation Opening WARNING! Do not allow children to have access to the trunk. Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in the trunk, young children may not be able to escape. If trapped in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke. Two latches must be released to open the lid. • From inside the vehicle, pull the engine lid release lever located under the left lower side of the dashboard. 2 Trunk Lid Emergency Release from inside the Trunk As a security measure, an internal trunk emergency release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the event of a person trapped inside the trunk, the trunk lid can be simply opened by pulling on the phosphorescent handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism. • Move to the outside and stand in front of the vehicle front grille. 51 Before Starting • Slightly lift the engine lid and push the safety catch as indicated by the arrow. The safety catch is located in the center of the lid. Closing Lower the engine lid, and then drop it. This should secure the inclusion of both latches. 2 CAUTION! To prevent possible damage, do not slam the engine lid to close it. • Lift the engine lid completely: this operation is facilitated by two gas struts keeping the lid in the fully open position. With the ignition switch in RUN position, the red symbol will display on the instrument panel with the message indicating that the engine lid is open. 52 WARNING! • Be sure the engine lid is fully latched before driving away. If the lid is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death. • Gear shifting is always active and may be performed even when one or more doors, the engine or the trunk lids are open. Therefore, in these conditions, take great care to avoid moving the gearshift lever and so accidentally engage gears. Occupant Restraint Systems Occupant restraint systems are some of the most important safety features in your vehicle: • Three-point seat belts (also called lap and shoulder belts) for the driver and all passengers. • Advanced front air bags for driver and passenger. • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a window. • Supplemental seat-mounted side air bags. • An energy-absorbing steering column and steering wheel. • Front and rear outer seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing the energy created during an impact. • All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR), which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat. Items Before Starting should not be placed in front passenger seat. Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible. If you are carrying children too small for adult-sized seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems. For more information on LATCH, refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)” in this section. WARNING! To help provide maximum protection, you are advised to keep the seatback in the most upright position possible and the seat belt close to your chest and pelvis. If the seat belt is loose, in the event of an accident you could move too far forward and could be injured. Travelling with the seatback too far reclined could also be dangerous: even if the seat belts are fastened, they may not work correctly. In fact, the belt itself may not be close enough to your body and, if it is in front of you, it could cause neck wounds or other injuries in an accident. Additionally, in an accident, the lower section of the belt could press against the upper part of your stomach rather than the pelvic area, causing serious internal injuries. NOTE: The advanced air bags have a multi stage inflator. This allows the air bag to have different stages of inflation based on the severity and type of collision. Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag: • Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat. WARNING! Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can cause severe or fatal injury to infants in that position. Do not use child seats or child booster cushions/backrests in the front passenger seat. Occupants in the front passenger seat must never sit on the edge of the seat, leaning toward the dashboard or otherwise sit out of position. The occupants’ back must be as upright as comfort allows, and must rest against the seatback with the seat belt properly fastened. Feet must be on the floor (i.e. not on the dashboard, seat or out of the window). 2 Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (see “Child Restraints System” in this section) should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints seats or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints seats or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm. If children 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints System” in this section). You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint system to make sure that you are using it properly. 53 Before Starting 2 • All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly. • The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as possible to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate. • Do not lean against the door or window. Your vehicle has Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) and Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB), and if deployment occurs, the SABIC and SAB air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door. • If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer. WARNING! In an accident, all occupants can suffer much greater injuries not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other occupants or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. 54 Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause an accident that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street. Statistics report that seat belts save lives and reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. Three-Point Seat Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with combination lap and shoulder belts. The belt retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions, conforming to the body of the occupants. However, in an accident, the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out. The driver is responsible for respecting, and ensuring that all the other occupants of the car also observe the local regulations concerning the use of seat belts. Always fasten the seat belts before starting the vehicle. Seat belts are designed to be used by persons whose physical characteristics (age, height, weight) are provided for by established legislation in each country. Anyone who does comply with these provisions may not travel in the front passenger seat. This also applies to children. Their heads are proportionally heavier and larger than those of adults, while their bones and muscles are relatively undeveloped. To help protect them in case of a collision, they must use special restraint or safety systems, even in the rear seat area. WARNING! • It is forbidden and dangerous to ride in a cargo area. In an accident, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow any person to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. (Continued) Before Starting (Continued) • Be sure all passengers are in a seat and using a seat belt properly. enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” • Wearing your belt improperly could make your injuries in an accident much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt properly and to keep your passengers safe, too. • Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in an accident, hurting one another severely. Never use a lap/shoulder belt for more than one person. • Remember that, in the event of an accident, the rear seat passengers not wearing the seat belts are not only subject to personal injuries but also represent a serious danger for the front seat occupants. Three-Point Seat Belts Use Instructions • Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat. • The seat belt latch plate is above your seat on the external side. • Hold the latch plate and pull the belt across you, make the belt go around your body and when the belt is long ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always latch your belt into the corresponding buckle. • A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt comfortably. WARNING! • The seat belts height must be adjusted only with the vehicle stationary. • Do not bring sharp edges in contact with a seat belt. This could reduce their initial strength and cause them to tear in the event of a crash. • If a seat belt has been brought in contact with a sharp edge, or has been used to pin something to it, have it immediately replaced by our Authorized Maserati Dealer. • A belt that is latched into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion of the belt could 2 • A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in an accident, increasing head and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can also cause internal injuries. • The lower part must adhere to the pelvis rather than the abdomen of the occupant. To fasten the lap belt pull the diagonal portion of the shoulder belt up slightly. To loosen the lap belt if too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an accident. WARNING! • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in (Continued) 55 Before Starting (Continued) an accident. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it comfortable. 2 • A twisted belt will not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. If you can't straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to an Authorized Maserati Dealer immediately. • Do not use devices (clips, fastenings etc.) that prevent the seat belts from laying close to the occupants bodies. • Do not carry children on a passenger’s lap using only one seat belt for protecting both. • Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt. • To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, guide the seat belt with your hand while it is rewinding, to prevent it from twisting. 56 WARNING! A frayed or torn belt could break in an accident and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt/retractor assemblies must be replaced by the Authorized Maserati Dealer after an accident if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn belt, etc.). Three-Point Seat Belt Height Adjustment Push the indicated button above the shoulder belt guide to release the anchorage, then move the belt slider up or down to the position that fits you best. WARNING! After the adjustment, always check that the slider to which the oscillating ring is fixed, is locked into one of the positions provided. With the handgrip released, push again downward to allow the anchoring device to click into place, in the event that it has not been released in one of the positions provided. WARNING! The seat belts height must only be adjusted when the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and right front passenger seating positions. Adjust the guide so the shoulder portion of the belt is on the shoulder and not falling off of it. The belt should be close to, but not contacting, the neck. When you release the anchorage try to move the belt slider up and down to make sure that it is locked in position. Before Starting Three-Point Seat Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted three point belt. • Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point. • At about 0.5 to 1 ft (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the belt 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. • Slide the latch plate upward over the folded belt. The folded belt must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate. • Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded belt. Passenger Seat Belts All passenger seat belts are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) and can be used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, see “Installing Child Restraint Systems using the Vehicle Seat Belt equipped with ALR” under “Child Restraint Systems” in this section. If the passenger belt with ALR is used for normal usage: only pull the belt out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. In this case, allow the belt to retract completely and then carefully pull out only the amount of belt necessary to comfortably wrap around the seat occupant. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click". WARNING! • Remember that, in the event of a violent impact, the passengers on the rear seats that are not wearing the seat belts are not only subject to personal injury but they also represent a danger for passengers sitting in the front seats. • Always fasten the seat belts. • Travelling without the seat belts fastened significantly increases the risk of serious injury in the event of a collision, even with the air bags. • In the event of a collision, the seat belts help reduce the possibility of the vehicle’s occupants being thrown against the structures of the passenger compartment or out of the vehicle. • The air bags are designed to work together with the seat belts, not to substitute them. The front air bags only deploy in the event of certain head-on collisions of sufficient intensity. They may not be activated if the vehicle rolls over, or in the event of rear bumps or minor frontal collisions, or non-frontal collisions. 2 Using Seat Belt in Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Mode Use the seat belt automatic locking mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature. Children under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height, should be properly buckled up in a child restraint system. Automatic Locking Mode Setting • Buckle the lap and shoulder belt. • Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted. • Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode. 57 Before Starting Automatic Locking Mode Unsetting 2 Unbuckle the three point seat belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle emergency locking mode. WARNING! • The belt and retractor assembly must be checked by the Authorized Maserati Dealer and must be replaced if the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly. • Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. Seat Belt Pretensioners The car is equipped with front and rear outer seat belt pretensioners, that reduce slack in the belts in the event of a severe frontal impact. This guarantees the perfect adherence of the seat belts to the occupants bodies before the restraining action begins. This car is also equipped with a second pretensioner in the front kick plate area. Its activation is signalled by the 58 shortening of the metal cable and curling of its protective sheath. Pretensioners work for all size occupant restraint systems, including the child restraint systems. NOTE: To obtain the highest degree of protection from the action of the pretensioning device, wear the seat belt tight to the chest and pelvis. Pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). A pretensioner may be used only once. Pretensioners do not require any maintenance or lubrication: any changes to its original conditions will invalidate its efficiency. If, due to unusual natural events (floods, sea storms, etc.), the device has been affected by water and mud, it must be replaced. WARNING! It is strictly forbidden to remove or tamper with the pretensioner components. Any service intervention must be carried out only by qualified and authorized personnel. Always contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer. CAUTION! Operations which lead to impacts, vibrations or localized heating (over 212°F/100°C for a maximum of 6 hours max.) in the area around the pretensioners may damage or deploy them erroneously. These devices are not affected by vibrations caused by uneven road surfaces or low obstacles. Contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer for any intervention that may be required. Before Starting Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert®) BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. The feature activates whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted, the seat belt reminder light and message will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened. The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h) for more than 19 seconds, by blinking the seat belt reminder light and message and by sounding an intermittent chime. Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seat belts are fastened. After the sequence completes, the seat belt reminder light and message remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened. If the opened front door on the driver or passenger side is closed and the occupant presence sensor detects a status change from occupant not present to occupant present the system will repeat the warning sequence. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual notification. The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may be triggered when a pet or heavy object is placed on the front passenger seat. It is recommended to restrain pets in the rear seat, in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and properly stow cargo. Seat Belts and Pregnant Women Seat belts should be worn by pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is greatly reduced for them and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. Pregnant women must position the lower part of the belt below the belly so that it passes over the pelvis and under the abdomen (see figure). 2 When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that the baby will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly. WARNING! Pregnant women should observe the above indications, as well as local regulation concerning the use of seat belts. In addition, pregnant women should consult a doctor with regards to the vehicle operation and seat belt usage. 59 Before Starting Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air bags 2 This vehicle has advanced front air bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver's advanced front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel in the area shown in the picture. On this area is embossed the word “SRS AIRBAG” for easier recognition. The passenger's advanced front air bag is mounted in the dashboard, above the glove compartment in the area shown in the picture. NOTE: These air bags are certified to regulations for advanced air bags. 60 The advanced front air bags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision. This vehicle is equipped with driver and front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation level of the advanced front air bags based upon seat position. This vehicle is also equipped with a front passenger seat belt buckle sensor that detects whether the front passenger seat belt is fastened. The seat belt buckle sensor may adjust the inflation rate of the advanced front air bag. This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the heads of front and rear outer occupants. The SABIC air bags are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled “AIR bag”. This vehicle is also equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) for driver and passenger pelvis-chest-shoulder protection during a side impact. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are mounted on front seats and are located in the outboard side of the front seats. NOTE: After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an Authorized Maserati Dealer immediately. Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components: • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC); • Air bag warning light on the instrument cluster; • Steering wheel and column; • Instrument cluster; • Driver advanced front air bag; • Passenger advanced front air bag; • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB); • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC); • Front and side impact sensors; • Front and rear outer seat belt pretensioners; • Seat belt buckle switch and seat track position sensors; • Pyrotechnical charge to cut power from the battery; it is located on the positive battery terminal. Before Starting WARNING! The air bag is not a substitute for the seat belts. Correct use of the seat belts, in combination with the air bag, will offer protection for the driver and passenger in the front seat in the event of a head-on collision. Advanced Front Air Bags Properties The advanced front air bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides air bag inflation rates which are appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors. The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. This inflation rate is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output, inflation rate, is used for more severe collisions. CAUTION! • The electronic control unit provides for the activation of the pretensioners, front air bags or side air bags (front and rear) based on different criteria, according to the type of impact. Failure of one or more systems to activate is not indicative of a system malfunction. • The front and/or lateral air bags may inflate if the vehicle suffers a violent impact involving the underbody area, for example in case of violent impacts against steps, sidewalks, speed bumps, or when the vehicle falls into potholes, or similar. WARNING! • Never place objects (e.g. mobile phones, toys, folders, tablets, etc..) on the passenger side of the dashboard since they could interfere with correct inflation of the passenger air bag and also cause serious injury to the occupants. • Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. 2 • Always drive with your hands on the steering wheel rim, so that the air bag can inflate freely if required. During the drive your back must be as upright as comfort allows and be against the seat back with the seat belt properly fastened. • Do not apply stickers or other objects on the steering wheel, on the dashboard in the passenger’s side air bag area, on roof side trims or on the seats. • Do not travel with objects in your lap, in front of your chest or especially with a pipe, pencil or other objects in your mouth. In the event of a collision, the deployment of the air bag could result in serious injury. • EXTREME HAZARD! Do not place a rearward-facing infant seat onto the front seat in front of a not deactivated air bag (see warning plate on the dashboard and above and behind the sun visors). (Continued) 61 Before Starting (Continued) Deployment of the air bag in an accident could cause fatal injuries to the infant regardless of the severity of the collision. 2 Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) protect the pelvis, chest and shoulder area of the occupants in the event of a side impact of medium/high severity. The SAB is marked with an “AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats. When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat's trim cover. Each air bag deploys independently. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) SABIC air bags are designed to protect the head of front and rear occupants in the event of a side impact, thanks to the wide cushion inflation surface. 62 Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side. WARNING! • Side air bags also need room to inflate. Do not rest your head, arms or elbows on the door, windows or the area in which the window bag is located to avoid possible injury during air bag inflation. Sit upright in the center of the seat. • Do not cover the front seatbacks with seat covers or anything that may adversely affect or impair the performance of the air bag. Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side air bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could cause serious injury. • Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. Before Starting Air Bag Deployment Sensors and Controls Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. Based on the impact sensor's signals, a central electronic ORC deploys the advanced front air bags, SABIC and SAB air bags, and front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on the severity and type of impact. Beyond what is previously described, the characteristics of the collision registered by the sensors and sent to the control unit of the ORC can also cause a sudden cut of the power from the battery, “blowing” the pyrotechnical charge located on the positive battery terminal. CAUTION! After a collision that has caused the blowing up of the pyrotechnical charge, this must be replaced at an Authorized Maserati Dealer. Advanced front air bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision. Advanced front air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The advanced front air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including those that may produce substantial vehicle damage, for example, some pole collisions, truck under rides, and corner impacts. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, advanced front air bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration. The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage alone are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed. Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all accidents, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag. The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position, in the ACC position, or not active, the air bag system is not activated and the air bags will not inflate. The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery has low power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. When starting the vehicle, ORC turns on the air bag warning light on the instrument cluster for approximately 4 to 8 seconds for a test. After the test, the air bag warning light will turn off. If the ORC, during the diagnosis phase detects a malfunction that could affect the air bag system, it turns on the air bag warning light and the “Service Airbag System” message either momentarily or continuously. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. A beep will sound if the light illuminates again after initial startup. 2 63 Before Starting not an indication of a system malfunction. 2 The air bag warning light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components. • Ignoring the air bag warning light and message in your instrument cluster could mean you won't have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the engine, or if it comes on as you drive, have an Authorized Maserati Dealer service the air bag system immediately. Front Air Bag Inflator Units WARNING! • If the ignition switch is in RUN position, the engine is off and the vehicle is in complete stop, the air bags can be deployed in case of collision. For this reason, children must never occupy the front seat in a rearward facing seat even if the car is not moving. Deployment of the air bag following an impact could cause fatal injuries to the child. Please note that when the ignition switch is in the OFF or ACC position or is turned off, the air bag will not deploy in case of collision. Therefore, in these cases, lack of air bag deployment is 64 When the ORC detects a collision requiring the advanced front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the advanced front air bags. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the dashboard separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. The advanced front air bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) Inflator Units The ORC unit determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of collision. Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered, releasing a quantity of nontoxic gas. The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This especially applies to children. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle. A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain air bag. Before Starting The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the head/s of the occupant/s seating in the outside seats from the edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The air bag inflates with enough force to possibly injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates. This especially applies to children. Front and Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events. Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if the communication network and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the accident, the ORC will determine whether the enhanced accident response system will have to perform the following functions: • cut off fuel to the engine; • turn hazard lights and interior lights on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition switch is turned off; • unlock the doors automatically; • disconnect the battery with a pyrotechnic charge. Air Bag Deployment Result The advanced front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment. If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur: • The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's instructions for cleaning. Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you. ENVIRONMENTAL! Air bag inflation releases a small amount of powder. This powder is not harmful to the environment. 2 WARNING! • Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by a Maserati Service Center. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well. • Have the air bag checked, serviced and replaced only by an Authorized Maserati Dealer. Air Bag System Maintenance WARNING! • Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail; thus you could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components (Continued) 65 Before Starting (Continued) or wiring. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. 2 • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system without the necessary know-how. • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to the Authorized Maserati Dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to the Authorized Maserati Dealer. • Only Maserati manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer. • If the speedometer, Rev Counter, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may not be 66 ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses. To identify the air bag fuse see “Fuse Replacement” in section 7. See the Authorized Maserati Dealer if the fuse is efficient. • As long as the air bag is activated, persons with disabilities are advised not to travel in the front seat in order to avoid the risk of serious injuries or death, even in minor crashes. Event Data Recorder (EDR) Transport of persons with disability If it is necessary to modify the advanced air bag system of your vehicle to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer. WARNING! • The advanced air bag system of your vehicle is not designed to protect adults with disabilities that require deactivation of the passenger or driver air bag. • If you or another occupant is an adult with a medical condition that requires air bag deactivation, please contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer. For further information on disabled driver or passengers see http://www.safercar.gov. This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • how various systems in your vehicle were operating; • whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; • how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and • how fast the vehicle was traveling. Before Starting These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to vehicle or the EDR. Child Restraint Systems Everyone in your vehicle must be buckled up all the time, including babies and children. Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems. Please be reminded that you can be prosecuted for ignoring this law. Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front. WARNING! In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint system suitable for the child’s size. There are different sizes and types of restraint systems for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always refer to the manual provided with child seat to ensure it is the proper type according the travelling child. Use the restraint system that is correct for your child. 2 Infants and Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child seat. Two types of child restraint systems can be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are 67 Before Starting 2 still younger than at least two years old. Children should remain rearwardfacing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their child seat. Both types of child restraint systems are fixed to the car by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)” in this section. WARNING! • Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearward facing infant seat. • Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. Older Children and Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing child seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for 68 children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat. These child seats are also fixed to the car by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)” in this section. All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are fixed to the car by the lap/shoulder belt. Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat. • Make sure that the child is upright in the seat. • The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible. • Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. • If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. NOTE: For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm WARNING! • Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The (Continued) Before Starting (Continued) child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. • A rearward-facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger air bag, which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant. Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint • Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. Maserati also recommends that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it. • The restraint system must be appropriate for your child’s weight and height. • Check the label on the restraint system for weight and height limits. • Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint system. • If installed improperly, it may not work when needed. • Fit the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer’s directions. WARNING! When your child restraint system is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury. Installing Child Restraint Systems using the Vehicle Seat Belt equipped with ALR The passenger seat belts are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) to secure child protection through a Child Restraint System (CRS). These types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint seat avoiding to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if the entire belt is pulled out of the retractor in order to enable the belt to retract subsequently. For additional information on ALR, see “Using Seat Belt in Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Mode ” in “Occupants Restraint Systems” in this section. To install a Child Restraint System with ALR, pull enough of the belt out of the retractor leading it through the belt path of the protection device. Slide the latch into the buckle until it clicks, then remove the entire safety belt from the retractor in order to rewound. While rewinding a click will indicate the safety belt is now in Automatic Locking mode. Exert then a traction on the exceeded lap section of the belt in order to tighten it around the child restraint seat. All seat belts will loosen over time, it is therefore necessary to check them periodically and set them properly. 2 Lower Anchors and Tether for Children (LATCH) Your vehicle's rear seats are all equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH system allows the child restraint systems to be fixed without using the vehicle's seat belts, instead fixing the child restraint system to the 69 Before Starting vehicle structure, using lower A anchorages and upper tether strap B. of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces. LATCH-Compatible child restraint systems are now available. You should never install LATCH child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage. If your child restraints are not LATCH-Compatible, install the restraints using the vehicle's seat belts. In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seat. The anchorages are located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window and are under a plastic cover (indicated in the figure) with the anchorage symbol on it. 2 • Route the seat belt to provide the most direct path between the anchorage and the child restraint system passing it over the headrest. • Attach the hook of the top tether strap (provided with the child restraint system) to the anchor. Installing a LATCH- Compatible Child Restraint System Follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions provided with the child restraint system. The lower LATCH anchorages are “U” metal rings located on the rear seat where the cushion meets the seatback and are located just below the symbol shown in the picture, but are not visible. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection 70 • Secure the child seat to the “U” lower metal rings positioned on the rear seat; • Fix the upper belt, also called Top Tether (provided with the child seat), to the attachments located in the rear part of the backrest. • Lift the plastic cover fitted behind the seat where you want to install the child restraint system. To fix a LATCH-Compatible child restraint seat proceed as follows. Before Starting NOTE: For any further details on installation and/or use, refer to the instructions provided with the child seat. • Tighten upper strap until you reach the tension level recommended by the restraint system manufacturer. To fix a child restraint system on center seating position introduce the hook end of the tether strap between the seatback and adjustable headrest (with the headrest in the full up position) then attach the hook to the anchor located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window. WARNING! • A child seat should be fitted only when the car is stationary. Follow the instructions for assembly, disassembly and positioning that the manufacturer must supply with the child restraint system. • An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchor position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. WARNING! • Improper installation of a child restraint system to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint system. 2 • Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. NOTE: • Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap. • When using a LATCH-Compatible child restraint system, please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children. 71 Before Starting 2 72 Transporting Pets ParkSense® Park Assist Park Assist Sensors Air bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in an accident. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by the vehicle seat belts. The ParkSense® Park Assist (hereafter called “Park Assist”) system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or front bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to “Park Assist System Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and recommendations. Park Assist system will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the RUN position. The Park Assist system is active only when the shift lever is in R (Reverse) or D (Drive). If Park Assist is enabled at one of these shift lever positions, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h). The four Park Assist sensors, located in the rear bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensor's field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles up to approximately 60 in (150 cm) from the rear bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle. The six Park Assist sensors, located in the front bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensor's field of view. Before Starting The sensors can detect obstacles up to a distance of approximately 50 in (120 cm) from the front bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle. Park Assist Warning Messages Display The Park Assist Warning screen will only be displayed if “Sound and Display” is selected from the MTC System. Refer to “MTC Settings” in section 4 for further information. The Park Assist Warning screen is located on the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the front/rear bumper and the detected obstacle. The warning display will turn on indicating the system status (Ready or Off) when the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or in D (Drive) and an obstacle has been detected. 2 The system will indicate a detected obstacle by displaying three fixed light arcs while beeping for a one-half second. The color indicates the distance and the arc indicates the position of the detected obstacle. The amber color of the arc indicates the medium and maximum distance, while the red color indicates the minimum distance. As the vehicle moves closer to the object the instrument cluster will display the arc moving towards the vehicle and the sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous. The vehicle is close to an obstacle when the instrument cluster displays one flashing red arc only, combined with a continuous sound. 73 Before Starting The following chart shows the warning alert visualization when the system is detecting an obstacle. NOTE: Park Assist will turn off the front park assist audible alert (chime) after approximately 4 seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied. 2 Warning Alerts Rear distance More than 60 in (150 cm) 60-40 in (150-100 cm) Front distance More than 50 in (120 cm) 50-40 in (120-100 cm) 40-24 in (100-60 cm) 40-14 in (60-35 cm) Less than 14 in (35 cm) Audible Alert None Single (rear only) Slow (rear only) Fast Continuous Arc-Type lights number None 3 - Solid 3 - Flash 2 - Flash 1 - Flash - Amber Amber Amber Red No Yes Yes Yes Yes Arc color Radio Mute 74 Before Starting Enabling and Disabling Park Assist Park Assist can be enabled and disabled using the MTC System. The available choices are: “Off”, “Sound Only”, or “Sound and Display”. See “MTC Settings” in section 3 for further information. When the Park Assist soft-key is pressed to disable the system, the instrument cluster will display the “Park Assist System disabled” message for approximately five seconds. See “Instrument Cluster” in section 4 for further information. When the shift lever is moved to R (Reverse) or to D (Drive) at a speed of 7 mph (11 km/h) or below and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster will display the “Park Assist off” message for approximately five seconds in R (Reverse) or for 5 seconds when the vehicle is in D (Drive). Servicing Park Assist System In case of malfunction of the Park Assist System, the instrument cluster will actuate a single sound, once per ignition cycle. The instrument cluster will display a message when any of the rear or front sensor(s) are blocked by snow, mud, or ice and the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse) or D (Drive). The instrument cluster will display the “Service Park Assist Sensors” message when any of the rear or front sensors are damaged and require service. When the shift lever is moved to R (Reverse) or D (Drive) and the system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will display the corresponding message for the time lapse the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or D (Drive) at speeds less than 7 mph (11 km/h). Under this condition Park Assist will not operate. See “Instrument Cluster” in section 4 for further information. If “...Wipe Off...” displays on the instrument cluster make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear bumper and/or front bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition switch. If the message continues to appear contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer. 2 If “Service Park Assist Sensors” or “Park Assist Unavailable Service Required” display on the instrument cluster, contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer. Cleaning the Park Assist Sensors When cleaning the sensors, take special care not to scratch or damage them; therefore, do not use dry, rough or hard cloths. The sensors must be washed with clean water, possibly adding car shampoo. Should you need to repaint the bumper or in case of paint touch-ups in the sensor area, please contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer. Incorrect paint application could affect the parking sensors operation. 75 Before Starting Park Assist System Usage Precautions looks over his/her shoulder when using Park Assist. NOTE: 2 • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of Park Assist. • Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., should not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the Service Park Assist message to be displayed in the instrument cluster. CAUTION! • Park Assist is only a parking aid and is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small ones. Parking curbs might only be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity. • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. When backing up, it is recommended that the driver 76 WARNING! Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Park Assist system. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. ParkView® Rear View Camera This vehicle is equipped with the ParkView® Rear View Camera that allows the driver to see an image on the MTC screen of the rear surroundings of the vehicle when the gear lever is put into R (Reverse). The image is displayed along with a caution note to “Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView® camera is located in the rear of the vehicle above the license plate. When the gear lever is shifted out of R (Reverse), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again. When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. The static grid lines will show separate zones in different colors that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. Before Starting The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone and color: Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 0 - 12 in (0 - 30 cm) Yellow 12 - 40 in (30 cm - 1 m) Green 40 in (1 m) or greater surroundings and must continue to be careful while reversing. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. CAUTION! • To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should be used only as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your driving path. • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView®. ParkView® On/Off • Turn the MTC on. • Press and release the “Settings” soft-key. • Press and release the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key. • Press the check box soft key next to “Parkview Backup Camera” to enable/disable it. 2 NOTE: WARNING! Drivers must be careful when reversing even when using the ParkView® Rear View Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before reversing. You are responsible for the safety of your If snow, ice, mud, or any other substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. 77 Before Starting Safety Tips Exhaust Gas Transporting Passengers 2 WARNING! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury. • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. WARNING! Exhaust gases can injure. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blowers switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. 78 The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the passenger compartment is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. Whenever detecting a change in the sound of the exhaust system or eventual exhaust fumes inside the vehicle have an Authorized Maserati Dealer inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. WARNING! CALIFORNIA proposition 65. Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Before Starting Vehicle Safety Checks Seat Belts • Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. • Do not disassemble or modify the system. • If the belt has been sharply pulled, for example as the result of an accident, the safety belt, together with the anchoring devices, the anchoring device mounting screws and the pretensioner (if available) must be completely replaced. Even if the belt does not present any exterior signs of wear or damage, it may have lost its restraining properties. Air Bag Warning Light The light should illuminate and remain lit for a few seconds bulb checking when the ignition switch is pushed in RUN position (see “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air bags” chapter in this section). • If the light does not illuminate while starting, contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer. • If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an Authorized Maserati Dealer. WARNING! Certain components of this vehicle such as air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, adaptive steering columns, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate. Floor Mats Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. 2 NOTE: The Authorized Maserati Dealer can provide you with any information about the available Maserati floor mats included in the Genuine Accessories range. Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower system on high speed (see “Air Conditioning Controls” chapter in section 4). You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield and front side windows. Contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable. WARNING! Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. • Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the proper fasteners. • Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and (Continued) 79 Before Starting (Continued) interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle. 2 • Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals. • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning. • Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control. • Mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory. Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle. 80 Tires Lights and Indicator Lights • Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. • Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. • Inspect tire tread for cuts and cracks. • Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. • Check lug nuts for tightness. • Check the tires (see “Tire Inflation Pressure” chapter in section 8) for proper cold inflation pressure. • Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you operate the controls (see “Lights” chapter in section 3). • Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel (see “Instrument Cluster” chapter in section 4). WARNING! Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires, and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires. Fluid Leaks Door Latches • Check for positive closing, latching, and locking of doors and trunk lid (see “Unlock Power Doors and Trunk Lid with Key fob” chapter in this section). • After parking overnight check under the vehicle for recent fluid leaks (oil, fuel, etc.). • If gasoline fumes are detected or fluid leaks are suspected, contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer. 3 – Understanding the Vehicle Interior Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Driver Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 “Comfort Luxury” Rear Seats (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Rear-View Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Windshield Wipers and Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Interior Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Power Sunroof with Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 HomeLink (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Air Conditioning Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 81 Understanding the Vehicle Interior Components Dashboard Components 3 82 Understanding the Vehicle 1 Adjustable side air outlets. 2 Engine START/STOP button. 3 Headlight switch. 4 Light dimmer controls. 5 Steering wheel controls. 6 Instrument cluster. 7* Right shift paddle +. 8* Left shift paddle –. Central Console Components 4 Cover for compartment with AUX and USB port. 5 Cover for cup holder and power socket compartment. 6 Unlock button for central console with cup holder and power outlet. 7 Central console covers with armrest function. Air outlets (adjustable). 9 Hood release. 8 10 Adjustable central air outlets. 9 11 Analog clock. Rear power sunshade and rear seats comfort controls panel. 12 MTC display. 10 Storage compartment. 13 Hazard lights switch. 11 14 Climate controls. Rear climate controls panel for four-zone air conditioner (optional). 15 SD Memory card slot. 16 CD/DVD slot. 17 Internal rear view mirror. 18 Front dome console. 19 Storage compartment handle. 20 Storage compartment. 21 Dashboard glove box handle. 22 Dashboard storage compartment. (*) If foreseen. Dual-zone A/C 3 Four-zone A/C 1 Automatic transmission shift lever. 2 Drive mode switches. 3 Electric Parking Brake lever. 83 Understanding the Vehicle Components between the Rear Seats 11* 12 V, 115 V power outlet and USB port. (*) For optional “Comfort Luxury” rear seats version. 3 “Comfort Luxury” rear seats 1 Armrest cup holder covers unlock button. 2 Armrest compartment unlock button with power outlet. “Comfort Luxury” rear seats 84 3* Cup holder compartment lid. 4* Rear seats comfort controls panel on rear storage compartment. 5* Front and rear right seat adjustment controls. 6* Left rear seat adjustment control. 7* Four-zones A/C controls panel (*). 8* Unlock button for covers on rear central console. 9* Storage covers with armrest function. 10* Reclining shelf to access storage box between the rear seats. Understanding the Vehicle Front Doors Components Rear Doors Components 4 Passenger power window switch. 5 Power door unlocks/locks, passenger door. 6 Trunk lid release. 7 Loudspeakers. 8 Storage compartment. 9 Internal door lock/unlock knob. 10 Door panel grip. 11 Reflex reflector. 12 Outside door handle. 13 Door lock button with “Passive Entry” function. 1 Inside rear door handle. 2 Grip. 14 Door outboard opening lock. 3 Loudspeaker. 4 Door storage pockets. 5 Power window and power doors lock/unlock buttons. 6 “Child protection” door lock system. 3 7 Inside door lock/unlock knob. 1 Inside door handle. 8 Reflex reflector. 2 Driver’s seat and rear mirrors memory switch. 9 Outside door handle. 3 Rear view mirrors, power windows and power switches door unlocks/locks switches panel. 85 Understanding the Vehicle Front Seats To manually lift or lower the head restraints press the indicated lateral button. Seats and seat belts are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle. 3 WARNING! Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment Front Power Seats The switches of the power seats are located on the outboard side of the seat cushion. Use these two front switches to move the driver's seat up or down, forward or rearward or to recline the seat cushion and the seatback. Use the rear switch to adjust the lumbar support. The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push the seat switch 1 forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch 1 when the desired position is reached. Seat Up/Down Adjustment The height of the seat can be adjusted up- or downward. Grip switch 1 from the back side and push it down or up. Release the switch 1 when the desired position is reached. CAUTION! If the seat's movement does not work, make sure that the corresponding fuse is not tripped (see chapter “Fuse Replacement” in section 7). WARNING! • Sitting in a reclining position while the vehicle is in motion could be dangerous. The seatback should not be tilted back too far. • The 3–point shoulder/lap belt must be firmly secured against the occupant's body in order to function properly. Therefore, both the driver's and passenger's reclining seatbacks must always be in an upright position while the vehicle is in motion; otherwise the 3–point shoulder/lap belt would not remain firmly positioned against the occupant's body. Serious injury could result! (Continued) 86 Understanding the Vehicle (Continued) • Remember that the head restraints must be positioned so that their upper edge is aligned with the top of the occupant’s head. In fact, only in this position can they provide the support required in the event of a bumper-to-tail collision. Seat Tilt Control (Up/Down) The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions. Pull upward or push the front of the switch 1, to move the front cushion seat in the direction of the switch. Release the switch 1 when the desired position is reached. Power Lumbar Push the switch 3 forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch 3 upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support. WARNING! • Never adjust the seat while driving. You could lose control of the vehicle. Moving the seat could distract you or make you press a pedal unintentionally. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. 3 • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. Seat Back Tilt Control The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch 2 forward or rearward, the upper seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch 2 when the desired position is reached. CAUTION! Do not place any object under a power seat or obstruct its movement as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat movement may become limited if there is an obstruction. 87 Understanding the Vehicle 3 Front Heated Seats Front Seats Heat Function The front seats are equipped with heaters in both seat cushions and seatbacks. The front seats heating is operated by the MTC System. NOTE: WARNING! • Persons with low skin sensitivity because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical conditions must be careful when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. • Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. 88 The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate. • Touch the “Controls” soft-key on the lower part of the MTC display. • Within 15 seconds, touch the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key once to select HI-level heating. NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes. • Within 15 seconds, touch the same soft-key a second time to select LO-level heating. • Within 15 seconds, touch the same soft-key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF. When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will indicate the change from HI to LO. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of approximately 45 minutes. Understanding the Vehicle Front Ventilated Seats (optional) Driver Memory Seat NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate. To enhance occupant's comfort by high external temperatures, both the driver and passenger seats, on request, can be ventilated. Small fans are located in the seat cushion and seatback, that draw air from the seat surface through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler when the temperature is high. The ventilated seats are operated with the MTC System. Front Ventilated Seats Function • Touch the “Control's” soft-key on the lower part of the MTC display. • Within 15 seconds, touch the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key once to select HI-level ventilation. • Within 15 seconds, touch the same soft-key a second time to select LO-level ventilation. • Within 15 seconds, touch the same soft-key a third time to shut off the seat ventilation. This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch. Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat, external side mirrors, adjustable pedals, power tilt and telescopic steering column and a set of programmed radio stations. Your key fob RKE transmitter can also be set to recall the same positions by pressing the button. 3 NOTE: • Only one key fob RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the memory positions. • Passive Entry door handles cannot be linked to the memory function. Use either the memory recall switch or the key fob RKE transmitter (if linked to the memory feature) to recall memory positions 1 or 2. The memory seat switch is located on the driver's door trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons: • The “S” (SET) button, which is used to activate the memory save function. 89 Understanding the Vehicle • The “1” and “2” buttons which are used to recall either of two programmed memory profiles. • Within five seconds, press and release the MEMORY button “1” or “2”. The instrument cluster display will show which memory position has been set. 3. NOTE: Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in P (Park), but the vehicle must be in P (Park) to recall a memory profile. 3 Memory Profiles Setting NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing profile from memory. To create a new memory profile, perform the following: • Cycle the ignition switch to the RUN position. • Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals, power tilt and telescopic steering column, and radio station presets). • Press and release the “S” button on the memory switch. 90 Pairing Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Seats Memory Your key fob with RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two programmed memory profiles by pressing the button on the RKE transmitter. To program your key fobs RKE transmitter, perform the following actions: 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the OFF position. 2. Select the desired memory profile that you wish to activate from the transmitter by pressing the button “1” or “2”. 4. Once the profile has been recalled, press and release the “S” button on the memory switch, then press and release button “1” or “2” accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” 1 or 2 will display in the instrument cluster. Press and release the button on key fob RKE transmitter within 10 seconds. NOTE: Your key fobs RKE transmitter can be unlinked to your memory settings by pressing the “S” button followed by the button on the key fob RKE transmitter in Step 4 above. Memory Position Recall NOTE: The vehicle must be in P (Park) to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in P (Park), the message “Memory System Unavailable Vehicle Not in Park” will display in the instrument cluster. Understanding the Vehicle To recall the memory settings for driver, press MEMORY button number “1” or “2” on the driver's door trim panel or the button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 or 2. A recall can be canceled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons (“S”, “1”, or “2”) during a recall. When a recall is canceled, the driver seat, external side mirrors, adjustable pedals and power tilt and telescopic steering column stop moving. A delay of at least one second will occur before selecting a new recall. Easy ENTRY/EXIT Seat This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you place the ignition switch to the OFF position. • When you cycle the ignition to the OFF position the driver seat: • will move to a position of ca. 0.31 in (8 mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is between 0.9 in (23 mm) and 2.67 in (68 mm) forward of the rear stop. • The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition into the ACC or RUN position. • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (23 mm) forward of the rear stop. In this position, there would be no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry. Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position. NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled or disabled using the MTC System, refer to “MTC Settings” in section 4 for further information. Rear Seats On standard version vehicles, rear seats can fit three passengers. Side seats are equipped with heating resistances. Seats and seat belts are parts of the occupant restraint system of the vehicle. 3 WARNING! Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. NOTE: • See chapter “Occupants Restraint Systems” in section 2 for seat belt positioning. • For vehicles equipped with “Comfort Luxury” rear seats with rear console storage compartment, refer to chapter “Comfort Luxury Rear Seats” in this section. • will move about 2.36 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to ca. 2.67 in (68 mm) forward of the rear stop; 91 Understanding the Vehicle Rear Head Restraints 3 Side seats are equipped with fixed head restraints. The center seat head restraint has two positions, up or down. When the center seat is being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised position. When there are no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be lowered in order to provide the driver maximum visibility. • To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. For easier operation, lower the rear armrest as described in the following paragraph. • To lower the head restraint, press the push button, located at the bottom of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint. 92 Inside the armrest there is an illuminated glove or document compartment. Pressing the opening button and lifting the cover of the armrest box you access a 12 V power outlet and USB port: a tablet plug may be installed. Rear Armrest The rear armrest is mobile and can be folded up into the seat back. • To lower it, pull the stripe as indicated. • To close it, pull it upwards then push it back into its seat. On the front part of the armrest there are two cup holders (see “Interior Features” in this section). • To close the compartment, lower the cover. Understanding the Vehicle CAUTION! The armrest is not designed to support the weight of an adult or a child: please use it only to store beverages, small objects or documents. Rear Side Heated Seats (optional for V6 Engine) The side rear seats are equipped with heaters both in seat cushion and seatback. Rear seats heating can be adjusted by operating control devices on the instrument panel located on the rear side of the central console. The panel also includes commands for the rear window sunshade (see “Power Sunshades on Rear Windows” in section 2) and optional commands for ventilation (see “Comfort Luxury Rear Seats” in this section). • Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as seat covers, blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. The buttons on the instrument panel with the resistance icon activate the heating on one or both seats. • Push the button once to select the highest heating level. The upper LED located on the side of the icon will illuminate. • Push the same button a second time to select the lowest level. The lower LED will illuminate. • Push the same button a third time to shut the heating elements OFF. The LED will turn off. NOTE: • Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes. • The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate. By selecting the HI-level setting, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HI-level. By setting the HI-level, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. The LO-level setting will turn off automatically after a maximum of approximately 45 minutes. 3 WARNING! • Persons with skin sensitivity or other physical conditions must be careful when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. 93 Understanding the Vehicle “Comfort Luxury” Rear Seats (optional) 3 This vehicle can be equipped with two rear seats equipped with ventilation and a heating power regulation system. In this version, the center rear seat is occupied by a central console with several features, a compartment and a small instrument panel to control rear seats, four-zones air conditioning and the sunshade on the rear window. A reclining shelf positioned centrally between both back rests enables access to power outlets and USB port. Beside the heating regulation system designed for a better comfort at high external temperatures, as described in the previous paragraph, the rear seats can be ventilated as well. The seat cushion and seatback are equipped with small fans drawing air from the seat surface through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger’s bodies cooler in case of high temperature. Seat Setting Devices Rear seat controls operating forward and backward adjustments are positioned on both sides of the central console storage compartment. By moving the seat forward or backward, you can change the tilt of the backrest as well. CAUTION! If the seat's movement does not work, make sure that the corresponding fuse is not tripped (see chapter “Fuse Replacement” in section 7). Head Restraint Manual Adjustment The head restraints can be tilted and their height adjusted manually in four positions. Lift the head restraint to the correct position. To lower it, press the button located at the bottom of the head restraint. The rear passenger sitting on the side opposite to the driver can move the front passenger seat by using the rear command. WARNING! Remember that the head restraints must be positioned so that their upper edge is aligned with the top of the (Continued) 94 Understanding the Vehicle (Continued) occupant’s head. In fact, only in this position can they provide the support required in the event of a bumper-to-tail collision. heating. The lower LED will illuminate. • Push the same button a third time to shut the heating and ventilation elements OFF. The LED will turn off. Instrument Panel on the Rear Central Console Central Console Features On the front part of the rear central console there is a cup holder, to open it press the cover as pointed out in the picture. To close it, lower the cover to the console support. The instrument panel on the rear central console storage compartment is divided into two areas: 3 • The front area with the control buttons for the rear seats comfort level and the sunshade on the rear window (see “Rear Window” in section 2). • The rear area with the control buttons for the four-zone air conditioning system (see “Air Conditioning Controls” in section 4). The buttons labeled with a blowerand a resistance icon are used for ventilation and/or heating control on one or on both seats. • Push the button once to select High level ventilation and/or heating. The upper LED beside of the icon will illuminate. • Push the same button a second time to select LO-level ventilation and/or NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate. By pressing the indicated button and opening the half-lids used as armrests, you can access the internal area of the storage compartment. 95 Understanding the Vehicle 3 The compartment is supplied with air-conditioned like the rest of the passenger compartment. The illuminated area of the storage compartment includes: a 12 V power socket/cigarette lighter, a button to exclude the air-conditioning of the compartment and two holders for bottle, can or cups. NOTE: For further information see “Interior Features” in this section. Reclining Shelf Rear Accessories To access devices centrally between the backrests, tilt the reclining shelf downwards. On request, an additional 115 V power outlet can be fitted. Behind the reclining shelf, you may access a power source of 12 V and a USB high capacity port for charging portable devices. NOTE: For further information see “Interior Features” in this section. 96 Understanding the Vehicle Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Wheel This feature allows you to power tilt the steering column upward or downward or to lengthen or shorten it in order to adjust the steering wheel to an optimized position. The power tilt/telescoping steering column/wheel switch is located on the lower left side of the steering column. To adjust the tilt of the steering column/wheel, move the switch up or down as desired. NOTE: You can use your key fob with RKE transmitter or the memory buttons on the driver's door trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column/wheel to programmed positions. See “Driver Memory Seat” in section 3. WARNING! Do not adjust the steering column/wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering column/wheel while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the steering column/wheel is adjusted before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once turned on, this function will operate for approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm. The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using the MTC System. 3 • Touch the “Controls” soft-key located on the lower part of the MTC display. • Within 15 seconds, touch the “Heated wheel” soft-key to turn on the function. • Within 15 seconds, touch the “Heated wheel” soft-key a second time to turn it off. Heated Steering Wheel (optional) To lengthen or shorten the steering column/wheel, pull the switch toward you or push the switch away from you as desired. NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate. The steering wheel contains a heating element inside the rim that helps warm driver’s hands by cold weather. 97 Understanding the Vehicle Adjustable Pedals WARNING! • You must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater if you have any sensitivity to heat. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods. 3 • Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as steering wheel covers of any type of material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat. The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow greater range of pedals positions enabling driver comfort with regard to the steering wheel tilt and the seat position. This feature allows the brake and accelerator pedals to move toward or away from the driver’s feet. The switch is located on the front side of the driver's seat cushion side shield. The following messages will be displayed if the driver is attempting to adjust the pedals when the system is locked out: • “Adjustable Pedals Unavailable While in Reverse”; • or “Adjustable Pedals Unavailable While Cruise Engaged”. NOTE: For vehicles equipped with driver memory seat, use your key fob (RKE) transmitter or the memory buttons on the driver's door trim panel to return the adjustable pedals to programmed positions. See “Driver Memory Seat” in section 3 for further information. Press the switch downward to move the pedals forward (toward the front of the vehicle). Lift the switch upward to move the pedals rearward (toward the driver). WARNING! Do not adjust the pedals position while the vehicle is moving. You could 98 lose control and have an accident. Always adjust the pedals position while the vehicle is parked. CAUTION! Do not place any object under the adjustable pedals or obstruct its movement as it may cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal movement may become limited if there is an obstruction in the adjustable pedal's path. Understanding the Vehicle Rear-View Mirrors External Mirrors External mirrors can be adjusted electrically and are equipped with anti fog resistors operated by the air conditioning system (see “Air Conditioning Controls” in section 4). The mirrors can be folded electrically and will yield in both directions in case of a collision. The external mirrors are electrochromic, which means, they automatically operate an anti glare function by gradually shading as the light hitting the mirrors increases. The exterior of the rear-view mirror support is equipped with LEDs, lighting up when the turn signals and vehicle entry/exit lights are activated. Mirrors Positioning The power mirror controls are located on the driver's door trim panel. The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. NOTE: The mirrors can be adjusted electrically only with the ignition key in RUN position. To adjust a rear view mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) button to select the mirror that you want to adjust. The spin button will illuminate indicating the rear view mirror is activated and can be adjusted. Press the mirror control switch corresponding to the arrow indicating the direction of the desired movement. For optimal vision orientate the outside(s) mirror(s) in order to frame the adjacent lane adjacent and get a partial overlap with the visible image on the inside rear-view mirror. Power mirror preselected positions can be reset by operating the optional Memory Driver Seat device. Check “Driver Memory Seat” in section 3 for further information. 3 WARNING! Vehicles and other objects seen in the external side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying only on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or object. Use the inside mirror to judge the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the external side convex mirror. 99 Understanding the Vehicle manually: it could damage the power mechanism. Tilt both Mirrors in Reverse 3 This feature provides automatic external rear-view mirrors positioning, allowing the driver to view the ground area behind the front doors. The external mirrors will move slightly downward from the current position when the shift lever is shifted into reverse. The external mirrors will then return to the original position when the lever is shifted out of the reverse position. Each memory set of the driver's seat (see "Driver Memory Seat" chapter in section 3) corresponds to a mirrors tilt position in reverse. Internal Rearview Mirror The internal rearview mirror can be manually adjusted, and is equipped with an accident-prevention release system operating in the event of a collision. Internal rearview mirror is electrochromic: this function is automatically deactivated in reverse to ensure maximum visibility of obstacles. NOTE: The mirrors tilt in reverse can be turned on and off using the MTC System, refer to “MTC Settings” in section 4. Folding Mirrors The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches. Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in; press the switch a second time to reset the mirrors to the standard position. If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they will automatically unfold. CAUTION! Never retract or open the mirrors 100 CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. Understanding the Vehicle Lights Light Switch The headlight switch located on the left side of the dashboard is used for the parking lights, headlights and fog lights operations. The regulation devices beside the switch (see “Interior Lights” in this chapter) can adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights, the doors controls rear lighting and the interior lighting. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first or to the second trigger the instrument cluster will display the related telltale. 3 NOTE: If the headlights or position/parking lights are on after the ignition is placed in OFF position, an audio signal will alert the driver while opening the driver's door. 101 Understanding the Vehicle Lighting Up External Lights according to the Position of the Headlights Switch, Ignition Device and Transmission and according to the Engine Status Ignition device position Engine status Transmission position OFF - - ACC Off P (Park) RUN Off P (Park) RUN On P (Park) RUN On Any position other than P (Park) 3 Lights switch position 0 All lights off Position/parking lights (1), side marker and license plate lights on Low beams, position/parking (1), side marker and license plate lights on All lights off Position/parking lights (1), side marker and license plate lights on (2) Low beams, position/parking (1), side marker and license plate lights on (2) All lights off All lights off Low beams, position/parking (1), side marker and license plate lights on (2) All lights off All lights off Low beams, position/parking (1), side marker and license plate lights on DRL (1) on (if enabled by MTC) DRL (1) on (if enabled by MTC) Low beams, position/parking (1), side marker and license plate lights on (1) The lighting system uses the same LED with two different levels of intensity: high for DRL and low for position/ parking lights. (2) The lights are powered up for 30 minutes to preserve the charge of the battery. 102 Understanding the Vehicle Lighting Up Internal Lights according to the Headlights Switch and Ignition Device Position mode • When lights switch is in and ignition switch in RUN, besides the outdoor lights, the rear Dome lights LED, the front Dome light (if enabled), the control backlight, the lighting of the instrument panel and front seats night lighting will light up. • Besides the external lights, the same interior lights indicated in the previous step based on the DAY or NIGHT mode established by the Ambient light detecting sensor will light up. In DAY mode, the control backlights will have 100% intensity. In NIGHT mode, the intensity can be adjusted by the right regulator (see “Interior Lights" of this chapter). • When the light switch position is "0" and the ignition device is in RUN mode, the control back light and night lighting will turn off. NOTE: During DAY mode, the control switches are not backlit except the windows and steering switches. Automatic Headlights This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light intensity detected by the twilight sensor. To turn the system on, rotate the lights switch clockwise to “AUTO” position. When the automatic system is activated, the headlight time delay feature is activated as well. This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into OFF position. To turn the automatic system off, move the lights switch out of “AUTO” position. NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights turn on in automatic mode. WARNING! • The responsibility for turning on the lights, depending on the daylight and regulations in force in the country of use, always lies with the driver. The automatic system for switching on and off the external lights is to be considered as an aid for the driver. If necessary, switch the lights on and off manually. • In case of fog during the day, the position lights and low beams will turn on automatically. The driver must always be ready to turn the lights on manually, including the rear fog lights. Headlights On with Wipers 3 When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on in “Adverse Weather” mode approximately 120 seconds after activation of the wipers, if the lights switch is placed in the “AUTO” position. The headlights will additionally turn off by deactivation of the wipers if previously activated with this function. NOTE: The Headlights ignition feature with wipers may be turned on and off using the MTC System, refer to “MTC Settings” in section 4. Headlights Time Delay This safety feature provides headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area. To activate the delay feature, place the ignition 103 Understanding the Vehicle 3 switch in the OFF or ACC position while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins when the lights switch is turned off (position “0”). If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place the ignition in RUN, the system will cancel the delay. If you turn the headlights off (“0” position) before the ignition, they will turn off in the normal mode. NOTE: • To activate this feature the lights must be turned off (“0” position) within 45 seconds of placing the ignition in the OFF or ACC position. • The headlight delay time is programmable using the MTC System, see “MTC Settings” in section 4. SmartBeam™ System The SmartBeam™ system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control (“Auto Dim High Beams” function) through the use of a digital camera fitted behind the rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from 104 high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle or the front vehicle is out of view. NOTE: • This function can be turned on or off using the MTC System, refer to “MTC Settings” in section 4 for further information. • If the headlights and rear parking lights of the vehicle in the visual field of the camera should be broken, covered in mud or obstructed, high beam headlights will remain lit for longer, up to a closer position of the oncoming or foregoing vehicle. Dirt, impurities and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens can cause the system to function improperly. • By replacing the windshield or SmartBeam™ mirror, the SmartBeam™ mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper performance. Please contact exclusively the Authorized Maserati Dealer for replacement. Daytime Running Lights (DRL) The lighting system uses the same high or low intensity headlights LED, respectively, for the DRL lights and position or parking lights. DRL lights will turn on when the engine is running and the shift lever is moved out of the P (Park) position. If a turn signal is activated, the DRL light on the same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is deactivated, the DRL light will light up again. NOTE: Depending on your Country’s regulations (for example: in Canadian vehicles DRL lights are always on), DRL lights may be turned on and off. Where the regulations permit, the DRL lights can be turned on and off using the MTC System, see “MTC Settings” in section 4 for further information. Adaptive Bi-Xenon Headlights The gas-discharge (xenon) headlights operate with an electric arc saturated with Xenon gas under pressure, instead of the incandescent filament. The light produced is assuredly higher compared to traditional light bulbs, in terms of quality (brighter light) as well as the span and positioning of the illuminated area. Understanding the Vehicle The headlight system combines the light beam with the steering angle to assure better visibility of the road surface when driving in a curve, steering or in the event of road deviations. NOTE: • Each time the adaptive headlight system is turned on, the headlights will perform a self-regulation cycle. • The adaptive headlight system is active only when the vehicle is moving forward. • “Steering Directed Headlights” function can be turned on or off using the MTC System, refer to “MTC Settings” in section 4 for further information. WARNING! If xenon headlamp replacement is necessary, contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer only: DANGER - RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK. Fog Lights The rear fog lights switch is built into the lights switch. To activate the rear fog lights, turn the headlight switch to the low beam light or “AUTO” position. Press the lights switch to turn on the rear fog lights. 3 NOTE: The rear fog lights will NOT activate automatically when turning on the low beam or “AUTO” headlights if previously deactivated by turning the lights switch off. The rear fog lights will only turn on by operating the switch as previously described. Pressing again the lights switch will deactivate the rear fog lights. Turning the lights switch off (position “0”) will also deactivate the rear fog lights. A dedicated telltale in the instrument cluster illuminates when the rear fog lights are turned on. 105 Understanding the Vehicle Multifunction Lever NOTE: The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals, headlight beam selection and overtaking lights. The multifunction lever is fitted on the left side of the steering column. • If either light remains on and does not flash, or flashes at a fast rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails while moving the lever, then the indicator bulb is probably defective. • A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the instrument cluster and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. 3 High Beams and Flashing Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever all the way up or down until the stop trigger; the left or right arrow on respectively the speedometer and Rev Counter instrument cluster, flashes to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. 106 To activate lane change function, tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent. The turn signals (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off. This function is useful when overtaking or changing lanes. To switch on the high beams with the light switch in headlamp or “AUTO” position, shift the multifunction lever onward. A related telltale will illuminate on the Rev Counter. Pulling the lever backward (toward the steering wheel) you switch off the high beams and switch on the low beams. Understanding the Vehicle Entry/Exit Illumination The compartment courtesy lights and the exterior lights can be switched on and off when entering or exiting the vehicle by pressing the buttons on the remote control and/or from the Passive Entry System. Check “Illuminated Entry/Exit” in section 2 for further information. 3 Interior Lights CAUTION! The high beams can only be switched on manually by pushing the left lever forward. You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is released. Flashing occurs also with lights off (lights switch in position “0”) if the ignition switch is RUN position. WARNING! If the high beams are activated, they will turn on automatically every time the low beams are switched on either manually or automatically. We recommend therefore that you switch them off when they are no longer necessary and every time the twilight sensor deactivates the external lights. The interior and external approach lights turn on and off when entering/exiting the vehicle (see “Illuminated Entry/Exit” in section 2 for further information). The brightness of the lights can be manually adjusted with the regulator positioned beside the multifunction lever. To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been shifted to OFF. This occurs if the interior lights were turned on manually or by opening of a door. The glove box light, share the same characteristics excepting the trunk light. To reset interior lighting operation, either turn the ignition switch out of OFF or rotate the multifunction lever out of “0” position. 107 Understanding the Vehicle Courtesy Dimmable Lights The following dimmable courtesy lights, can be set with the regulation device: 3 108 • instrument cluster dials and display; • dome light (front/rear); • inside door handle LED; • doors and steering wheel backlight controls LED; • front footrest light; • front seats night lighting. Understanding the Vehicle Dimmer Controls 3rd Dimmer controls are located beside the multifunction light control lever. Stable position: allows switching on the main and the reading lights of the front dome light. NOTE: The left regulator operates only with park lights or low beams lights on. The right regulator has 2 different positions: The regulation device rotates from position “0” downward and back upward performing stable and dimmable positions. 0 (OFF) Stable position: front seat lighting and front dome light LED are turned off. 1st Dimmable position: allows minimum to maximum brightness tuning of the front dome light LED and the front seats lighting. The left regulator switch has 4 different positions: 0 (OFF) Stable position: lower level of the internal lighting. 1st Dimmable position: allows minimum to maximum brightness tuning of the instrument cluster dials, display, control switches and MTC’s backlight, including all displayed messages. 2nd Stable position: allows maximum brightness set. NOTE: The right regulator is only active if the switch is in “AUTO” or in low beam mode . Dome Lights The front and rear part of the dome, include each a central and two reading lights. The central light automatically turns on when one of the doors is opened and turns off when the door is closed (timed switching off). The light may be switched on manually by pressing the central button. The reading lights are controlled by the respective side buttons. If they are turned on by pressing the button, both central and reading lights will stay on for about 10 minutes after turning the engine off, and will then turn off gradually. When the exterior lights are switched on, the two night LEDs fitted on the side of the buttons will light up to facilitate use of the shift lever and the central console. If one or more doors are opened, the front and rear dome lights will turn on for 27 seconds. If the door is closed before this time, the lights will dim and subsequently switch off after about 3 seconds. 3 109 Understanding the Vehicle NOTE: The dome lights will also turn on by pressing the or button for centralized doors unlock and lock on the key fob RKE transmitter. See “Illuminated Entry/Exit” section 2 for further information. Integrated External Rear View Mirror Lights NOTE: Driver and passenger external mirrors are supplied with LED turn signals integrated on the support. The LED turn signal indicators flash simultaneously with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the hazard warning lights will also activate these LEDs. On the front dome light there are also the sunroof control and the HomeLink® controls (if foreseen). Hazard Warning Flashers 3 Press the indicated button on the center of the control panel to turn on the hazard warning flashers. The operation is independent from the ignition key position. Press the button again to turn them off. When these lights are on, the turn signals, the related indicator light on the instrument cluster and the button itself will flash. In the event of a collision causing automatic interruption of fuel supply, the dome lights switch on 110 automatically and remain lit for approx. 15 minutes. Understanding the Vehicle Windshield Wipers and Washers The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition switch is placed in RUN or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column. The headlight and windshield washers share the same fluid reservoir, and a low fluid level is indicated by the same indicator light and by the message on the instrument cluster. To refill the fluid, see “Maintenance Procedures” in section 7. • To turn the wipers off rotate the lever to “OFF”. CAUTION! Windshield Wipers • Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of the four settings to activate the automatic intermittent setting (see “Rain Sensing Wipers” paragraph in this chapter). • For low speed wiper operation (stable position "LO"): rotate the end of the multifunction control lever forward to the first trigger after the intermittent setting. • Rotate to the second trigger after the intermittent setting for high-speed (stable position HI) wiper operation. • Rotate the end of the lever downward to the “MIST” position to activate a single wipe cycle. The wipers will continue to operate until you release the multifunction lever. • Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. The windshield wipers may be damaged if the wiper control is left in any position other than “OFF”. • In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield, the wiper motor may be damaged when the vehicle is restarted. • Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, the wiper motor may be damaged. 3 111 Understanding the Vehicle Rain Sensing Wipers 3 This feature detects moisture on the windshield through an internal rear view mirror integrated sensor, which automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to adjust the detection system. Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions. The rain sense wipers will automatically change between an intermittent wipe, slow wipe and a fast wipe depending on the amount of detected moisture sensed by a particular area of the windshield. Place the wiper switch in the “OFF” position when you do not want to use the automatic intermittent system. The rain sensing feature can be turned on and off using the MTC System, see “MTC Settings” in section 4 for further information. CAUTION! • The rain sensing feature may not function properly with ice or dried salt water on the windshield. 112 • Use of RainX® or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor performance. The rain sensing system has protective features for the wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the following conditions: • Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit: the rain sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is in RUN position, the vehicle is stationary and the outside temperature is below 32 °F (0°C), To resume, set the automatic feature on the multifunction lever, start the engine and drive or wait until the outside temperature rises above freezing. • Neutral Wipe Inhibit: the rain sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN position, the transmission shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h). To resume, set the multifunction lever to the automatic function or move the shift lever out of N (Neutral). Headlights On with Wipers When activating this function, the headlights will light up approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in “AUTO” position. In addition, the headlights switch off when the wipers are turned off (position “OFF”) if they were previously turned by using this function. Powering on Headlights with wipers can be activated and deactivated with the MTC System, see “MTC Settings” in section 4 for further information. Wipers Blades Maintenance When the wiper arms are in “P” (park position) it is not possible to check or replace the blades (Service position) as they are folded under the hood. To service the blades it is necessary to shift the multifunction lever to “OFF” and the ignition switch to OFF position. Shift the control lever within 15 seconds to the “MIST” panic position (counterclockwise rotation of the twist switch) and release. The blades are brought in a position enabling the opening of the wiper arms and change of the blades. It is possible to use the panic position for a maximum of 3 Understanding the Vehicle times within two minutes, corresponding to different the blades positions on the windshield. When completed bring the ignition switch in RUN: the arms will reposition. If necessary move the multifunction lever to other required operating positions. WARNING! Operate or service the wiper blades without deactivating the wipers (“OFF” position) leaving the ignition switch in RUN can be dangerous for the operator since the rain sensor may suddenly activate the wipers. Always use “Service” position for any intervention on the wiper blades. Windshield and Headlight Washers To use the washer, push the end of the multifunction lever inward (toward the steering column) and hold it as long as washer spray is desired. If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the automatic intermittent range, the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the previously selected intermittent interval. If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off (OFF) the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off. At low external temperatures, the fluid supply nozzles are heated by internal resistors to avoid fluid freezing inside. WARNING! • Do not start the windshield washer during the cold months until the windshield has warmed up. If it has not warmed up, the liquid could freeze on the glass and block your view. • Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use. 3 The multifunction lever also operates the headlight washers when the ignition switch is in RUN position and the headlights are turned on. The headlight washers will spray a timed high pressure spray of washer fluid onto each headlight lens every 11 windshield wipers cycles. 113 Understanding the Vehicle Interior Features Electric Power Outlets 3 The vehicle is equipped with three 12 Volt (13 Amp) electric power outlets, one available for each front seats, rear seats passengers and one fitted in the trunk. In vehicles with “Comfort Luxury” rear seats, there is an extra 12 V power outlet inside the rear console storage compartment and others in the rear of the reclining shelf between the seats. All power outlets are supplied only when the engine is started or the ignition device set on ACC or RUN. Power outlets are protected by a fuse. Insert a cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power outlets to ensure proper operation. Otherwise, check the matching fuse integrity, see “Fuse Replacement” in section 7 for further information. any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Damages caused by improper use of the power outlet are not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. WARNING! To avoid serious injury or death: • Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. • Replacing the fuses that protect power outlets with others of higher amperage, there is the risk of fire. • Do not touch with wet hands. • Close the lids when the plug is not used and while driving the vehicle. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. Power Outlet inside the Cup Holder CAUTION! • Do not plug in accessories that exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts or 150 Watts at 115 Volts. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert 114 To access the power outlet inside the cup holder beside the shift lever, press the cover as indicated to open completely. WARNING! High power consumption items plugged into this outlet for long periods may discharge the battery and/or prevent the engine from starting. Understanding the Vehicle Power Outlets inside the Central Console To access the power outlet located inside the glove box of the central console you need to open the half-lids as indicated in the following paragraph. 3 Rear Power Outlets A 12 V power outlet both inside the central console and in the rear of the reclining shelf, are available for rear seats passengers (see “Comfort Luxury Rear Seats” in this section). In the rear of the reclining shelf, on request, can be installed a 115 V - AC (150 W) power outlet. “Comfort Luxury” Rear Seats Power Outlet inside the Trunk The power outlet is positioned on the right side of the trunk. If the vehicle is equipped with bench seats, a 12 V power outlet inside the armrest between the seats, is available for rear seat passengers (see “Rear Seats” in this section). “Comfort Luxury” Rear Seats 115 Understanding the Vehicle Cup Holders The vehicle is equipped with several cup holders. CAUTION! 3 • Use light and shatterproof containers. • Do not forcefully push unsuitable containers into the cup holders to prevent damage to the containers. • Do not store hot drinks. Front Seats Cup Holders Pressing the indicated button, the half-lids will rise completely enabling access to the inner compartment where the two cup holders are located. NOTE: Vehicles equipped with the four-zone air conditioning system, are not equipped with cup holders inside the central console. The front cup holders are located within the central console beside the transmission shift lever. To access the cup holder, push the lid as shown in the picture and it will open completely. The storage and passenger compartment share the same air conditioning even though you may exclude the air conditioning of the cup holder compartment by moving the indicated button. 116 To close one or both of the half-lids, push them down to the locking position. Understanding the Vehicle Rear Seats Cup Holders Two cup holders are available in the frontside of the rear seats central armrest, press the button as shown in the picture to access them. 3 “Comfort Luxury” rear seats AUX and USB Port The AUX and USB ports are located inside the compartment behind the transmission shift lever. To access the ports, push the lid as indicated: it will open completely. On vehicles equipped with the “Comfort Luxury” rear seats, the cup holders are located in the front and rear central storage compartment (see “Comfort Luxury Rear Seats” in this section for further information). The AUX auxiliary port features: • typical input impedance between AUX-IN and AUX_REF: 13 Kohm; • max. applicable voltage: 0.75 Vrms at 1 kHz; • input compatible only with 3.5 mm jack connectors (not included). Any player with these characteristics and analog audio output (headset output type) can be served by the MTC System. The system can recognize the connection to a player outlet autonomously enabling access to the audio functions connected to this source. The USB port , available by removing protection cap, allows the data exchange and charge of the connected source. If there are MP3 files on the USB device, they will automatically start playing. 117 Understanding the Vehicle If you are already listening to music from a different source you need to select the USB function to start playing audio contents (refer to the MTC guide). NOTE: 3 • Another USB port is present inside the armrest between the rear bench seats. • Optional “Comfort Luxury” rear seats are equipped with a USB port beneath the reclining shelf between the seats (see “Comfort Luxury Rear Seats” in this section). • The "Rear Seat Entertainment" option, includes a AUX and a USB port in the rear of each front seat (see “Interior Features” in this section). iPod® Connection An iPod® can be connected to the system via USB and AUX ports by means of a special cable (optional). The MTC will then control the following functions: play, pause, fast forward, rewind, next track, previous track, random or repeat mode, selection and navigation of playlist/genre/singer/album/Podcast. 118 CAUTION! Do not leave your USB device, iPod® or an external audio source in the vehicle for extended period of time: extreme temperatures and humidity can occur in the vehicle. Sun Visors Sun visors can be folded to the front and to the side of the vehicle. To move the visor laterally, lower and release it from its catch as indicated. By lowering the visor on the passenger's side you can access the courtesy mirror with incorporated light illuminating automatically (with the ignition switch in RUN) by raising the mirror protective cover. Before raising the visor, close the mirror cover. A paper holder is fitted inside each sun visor. Understanding the Vehicle Smoking Kit (optional) The kit includes a lighter and a removable ashtray with cover. The Smoking kit for front seats passengers is located inside the box beside the transmission shift lever and can be accessed by pressing the cover as indicated. The rear seat passengers can use the removable ashtray by inserting it into the rear doors pocket, while the lighter can be inserted into the power outlet inside the armrest between the rear seats. On vehicles equipped with rear seats “Comfort Luxury” Smoking kit, lighter and ashtray are fitted inside the center console between the seats. CAUTION! After use, always make sure that the cigarette lighter is switched off. WARNING! • The cigarette lighter reaches high temperatures. Handle it carefully and do not allow children to use to avoid risk of fire and injury! 3 • The cigarette lighter outlet may not be used as a power. “Comfort Luxury” Rear Seats Pressing the central button activates the cigarette lighter. After about 20 seconds the button returns automatically to the initial position and stops the heating: now the cigarette lighter is ready for use. 119 Understanding the Vehicle Handholds and Cloth Hooks Map Pockets Tables (optional) Handholds are fitted above the passenger doors. Once grabbed, they will lower until the block position. When released, a return spring will bring them back to the original position. Front seats are fitted with map pockets, on the rear of the seatbacks, and accessible by rear passengers. Tables are fitted in the back of the front seats. 3 Rear handholds also include a clothes hook. CAUTION! Do not put heavy or sharp objects in the map pockets. 120 • Opening: press the upper button and lower the table until the supporting mechanism snap locks. • Closing: lift the table until the upper button snap locks. Understanding the Vehicle CAUTION! As the table is not equipped with cup holders, do not place open drinks containers on the tables during the journey in order not to damage or stain the surrounding upholstery if they fall over. Rear Seat Entertainment (optional) See the user guide provided with the vehicle documentation. This optional includes the installation of a screen in the rear of each front seatback and a remote control to connect with an external video source and any audio devices. iPad Holder (Genuine Accessory) The Authorized Maserati Dealer can provide you with all information about the “Maserati iPad Holder” mounted on the rear of the front seatbacks, available in the Genuine Accessories range. 3 WARNING! • When the table is not used, it should be closed to prevent rear seat passengers from being hit by its edges and corners. • When closing the table, hold it up carefully in order to avoid pinching your fingers. Inside the map pocket on the rear of the seat-back there are two leds to illuminate the RSE system outlets. 121 Understanding the Vehicle Cargo Area 3 WARNING! To help protect against personal injury, passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and use seat belts. Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear. The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR indicated on the label. Vehicle Loading Vehicle Load Carrying Capacity The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the vehicle homologation label positioned on the driver's side rear door pillar. WARNING! • Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way the vehicle steers, handles and the way the brakes operate. • Never drive with the trunk open. Exhaust gases can enter the passenger compartment. • Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback. This could impair visibility or become dangerous in a sudden stop or collision. The information indicated on the label concerns passengers and luggage loading operations. 122 The trunk is the most suitable place to load bulky and heavy objects onboard the vehicle. The maximum allowable load on the floor of the trunk is 440 lb (200 kg). To load your vehicle properly, store heavier items below and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before you start driving as they could move during the trip. Light objects can be stored in the net pocket on the right side of the trunk. To fasten heavy and bulky luggage inside the compartment a luggage net with hooks anchored to the floor is available upon request. The hooking eyelets of the net are positioned on the floor and on the rear wall of the trunk. Understanding the Vehicle NOTE: To safely store the Ski and Snowboard Bag, tilt forward the short seatback side. Secure the rear hook of the bag to the eyelet located on the rear wall of the trunk compartment. Wrap the belt around the seat back of the folded seat and fasten the belt buckle. Tighten the belt as much as necessary to prevent the bag from moving. 3 NOTE: The Authorized Maserati Dealer can provide you with information about the available Genuine Accessories for the trunk compartment. Loading with Rear Seatbacks Down The 60/40 split-folding rear seat with folding option on the smaller side only, provides cargo-carrying versatility. The seatback folds down easily by pulling the tab between the seatback and the bolster. The seat folded down, provides a continuous nearly-flat extension of the load floor able to accommodate large sized equipment and objects (such as the “Maserati Ski and Snowboard Bag”) that may not fit with the normal dimensions of the trunk. When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap. WARNING! • Make sure that the seatback is securely locked into position. (Continued) 123 Understanding the Vehicle (Continued) If the seatback is not securely locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. 3 • The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated and use proper restraint system. Power Sunroof with Sunshade The sunroof is power controlled and can only be operated with the ignition switch in RUN position. It can slide lengthways and be raised at the rear (tilting). By opening the sunroof a front flap rises automatically in order to deviate the air flow. The power sunroof controls are located between the sun visors on the overhead console. The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open. WARNING! • Improper use of the sunroof can be dangerous, even if it features a finger-trap prevention system. Before and during the sunroof operation, always make sure that passengers are not exposed to the risk of injuries caused by the moving roof or by personal objects dragged or hit by the moving sunroof. • Never leave children in a vehicle with the key fob RKE transmitter in the passenger compartment. (Continued) 124 Understanding the Vehicle (Continued) • In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from the vehicle if the sunroof is open. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too. • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never insert fingers, other body parts, or any object through the opening sunroof. CAUTION! • In the event of rain, always close the sunroof to prevent water infiltrations from staining the fabric/leather upholstery. • Do not open the sunroof if there is ice on it: risk of damage. Slide Opening Sunroof • Full automatic express opening Press the button rearward for more than half second and the sunroof will open automatically regardless of any previous position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. During this operation, if any sunroof button is pressed, the sunroof will stop. • Full or partial manual opening To open the sunroof manually press the rearward button for less than half second to move step by step the sunroof panel. Venting Sunroof Press and release the central button, and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”, and will occur regardless of sunroof position. During this opening operation, any movement of the button will stop the sunroof. Closing Sunroof • Full automatic express closing Press the forward button for more than half second and the sunroof will close automatically regardless of any previous position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. During this operation, if any button is pressed, the sunroof will stop. • Full or partial manual closing To close the sunroof manually press the forward button for less than half second to move step by step the sunroof panel. Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during express close operation. If an obstruction is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. If this occurs, remove the obstruction then press the forward button and release to express close. 3 NOTE: If three consecutive attempts to close the sunroof result in pinch protect reversals, the fourth attempt will be manual, with pinch protect feature disabled. Pinch Protect Override If any obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing the sunroof, press the forward button and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move toward the closed position. NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while pressing the forward button. 125 Understanding the Vehicle To Close the Power Sunroof with RKE Transmitter and Ignition Off 3 When the ignition switch is in OFF position, if the sunroof is open, it can be closed together with the windows by pressing the button on the RKE transmitter (refer to “Power Windows” in Section 2). together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting. Ignition Off Operation • Press and release the button. • Press a second time the button and keep it pressed until the sunroof is completely closed. The power sunroof controls will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is in OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The ignition system timing can be set using the MTC System (see “MTC Settings” in section 4). NOTE: Sunroof Maintenance Pressing the button on the RKE transmitter will only open the windows but will have no effect on the sunroof. Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel. HomeLink® (Optional) HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate automatic devices that open garage doors and gates, enable/disable the lighting or security systems. The HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery. The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the overhead console designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® warning light is located above the center button. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure or a helicopter-type sound. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows 126 NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the vehicle security alarm is active (see “Vehicle security alarm” in section 2). Understanding the Vehicle General Information WARNING! • Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355– 3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance. • Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference. • This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: • The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device. • The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. Before You Start Programming HomeLink® Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming. For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink® system. Before starting programming it is necessary to erase the standard codes memorized on the HomeLink® device during the production phase. To erase such codes: 3 • place the ignition device in the RUN position without starting the engine; • press and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) until the warning light starts flashing (after approximately 20 seconds); • release the buttons. 127 Understanding the Vehicle 3 NOTE: • Erasing the standard codes should only be performed when programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not perform this operation to program additional buttons. • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance. System with devices provided with rolling codes has been acquired and programmed correctly by the HomeLink® system. Programming the hand-held transmitters NOTE: For programming garage door/gate openers that were manufactured after 1995. These devices can be identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” setting button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door/gate opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. • Place the ignition device to the RUN position without starting the engine. • Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (5 - 30 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program. • Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink® button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button. • Continue to hold buttons until the warning light starts flashing quickly; then release both buttons. The quick flashing light indicates that the channel with the new frequency 128 • On the last versions of this device it is no longer necessary to keep the button on the transmitter and the HomeLink® buttons pressed; you just have to release the HomeLink® button immediately and keep only the first one pressed. • The distance necessary between the portable hand-held transmitter and the HomeLink® in the vehicle depends on the system you wish to program. Probably it will be necessary to try several times. Upon every attempt, keep the setting position for at least 15 seconds before trying again. Synchronizing the rolling codes At the end of the previously described programming, if the HomeLink® has been programmed for a rolling code system, it will be necessary to synchronize it to ensure its correct operation. • Locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” setting button of the opening motor. Firmly press it and then release it. On some garage door openers/devices Understanding the Vehicle there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the setting button has been pressed. • Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink® button for two seconds and then release it. • Repeat this operation a second time. If the garage door opening device activates, the programming/ synchronization phase is complete. NOTE: If the garage door opening device does not activate, press the button a third time for two seconds and then release it to complete the programming/synchronization phase. • To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels. Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps: • Place the ignition device to the RUN position without starting the engine. • Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. • Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming the hand-held transmitters” from second step and follow all remaining steps. System with devices without rolling code Programming the hand-held transmitters For programming garage door openers manufactured before 1995. • Turn the ignition device to the RUN position without starting the engine. • Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (5 to 30 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program. • Simultaneously press and hold both buttons until the warning light starts flashing quickly; then release both buttons. The quick flashing light indicates that the channel with the new frequency has been acquired and programmed correctly by the HomeLink® system. NOTE: The distance necessary between the portable hand-held transmitter and the HomeLink® in the vehicle depends on the system you wish to program. Probably it will be necessary to try several times. Upon every attempt, keep the setting position for at least 15 seconds before trying again. 3 • Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button. If the garage door opener/device activates, programming is complete. To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. Do not erase the channels. Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps: • Place the ignition device to the RUN position without starting the engine. • Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. • Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming the hand-held transmitters” from second step and follow all remaining steps. 129 Understanding the Vehicle 3 Using HomeLink® Troubleshooting Tips To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time. If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here are some of the most common solutions: Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle. To erase the channels press and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) until the warning light starts flashing (after approximately 20 seconds). The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when the vehicle security alarm is active (see “Vehicle security alarm” in section 2). 130 • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter. • Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to complete the training for a rolling code. • Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in? If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance. Understanding the Vehicle Air Conditioning Distribution 3 A/C Dual-zone 131 Understanding the Vehicle 3 A/C Four-zone 132 Understanding the Vehicle Adjustable and fixed air vents allow Air Conditioning System to achieve the optimal comfort conditions. • The fixed vents, positioned on the upper part of the dashboard, beneath the windshield and above the front part of the front door panels are meant to guarantee the demisting and defrosting of the windshield and the side windows. • The fixed vents under the dashboard and below the front seats aim to ventilate the lower part of the passenger compartment. 3 A/C Four-zone floor vent A/C Dual-zone floor vent • The adjustable air vents are located at the center and at the side ends of the dashboard. They have the purpose of ventilating the upper part of the passenger compartment. Two more vents, adjustable by the rear passengers, are placed at the rear end of the central console. • Optional four-zone air conditioning provides additional adjustable vents on the side pillars between the doors. These vents can be adjusted in vertical and horizontal direction, by operating on the central paddle 1, as indicated in the following pictures. The rotor 2, located near each air vent, allows to regulate the airflow, or to close the vent. Orienting these vents it is also possible to demist the rear-door windows. 133 Understanding the Vehicle 3 A/C Four-zone side pillar vent NOTE: In order to avoid the obstruction of the windshield defrost vents, it is recommended not to place objects on the dashboard. 134 4 – Dashboard Instruments and Controls Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 MTC Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Slot for SD Memory Card and CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Dashboard Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Phone and Voice Controls on Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 172 172 180 135 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Instrument Cluster The instrument cluster is divided into three main areas displaying information, symbols and text and/or icon messages. 4 A. Analogic speedometer. It indicates the vehicle speed in MPH. B. Rev Counter. C. TFT display. NOTE: The image shows the instrument cluster before starting the engine. V8 Engine V6 Engine 136 Dashboard Instruments and Controls In the TFT area, the odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven. U.S. Federal Regulations requires that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service. This repair should be performed by an Authorized Maserati Dealer. The odometer setting should be maintained following the repair or service. Keep a record of the odometer mileage before any repair or service to ensure that the odometer is properly reset. Speedometer and Rev Counter display the main warning lights (see “Warning Lights on Analog Instruments” in this chapter). The other warning lights are displayed in the lower part of the TFT display (see “Warning Lights on Display” in this chapter). Warning Lights on Analog Instruments Warning Lights on Speedometer The following warning lights are displayed on the speedometer, and related messages are visible for 5 seconds on sector 1 of the display, unless otherwise indicated (see “TFT Display” paragraph in this chapter). V6 Engine Malfunction warning messages will be stored in “Stored Messages” (see example in picture). 4 V8 Engine 137 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) 4 138 The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD II, that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. Under normal conditions, this indicator should illuminate when the ignition switch is in RUN position and switch off once the engine has been started (the MIL does not shut off immediately). This is a sign of the indicator light working properly. If the indicator remains lit or switches on while driving, there is a failure in the fuel supply/ignition and emission control systems. The failure could cause high exhaust emissions, loss of performance, poor vehicle handling and high fuel consumption levels. Should this occur, proceed with caution to your Authorized Maserati Dealer without heavy throttle application or driving at high speeds. Obey all applicable local traffic regulations. The indicator light will go out if the problem is no longer present. The error will be registered by the system in any case. WARNING! Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. CAUTION! • When the ignition switch is in the RUN position and if the indicator light does not switch on or if it switches on while driving, contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as possible. • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. In addition, the OBDII system incorporates a diagnostic connector that can be interfaced using diagnostic equipment. This makes it possible to read the error codes stored in the control unit, together with a set of specific parameters for the engine operation diagnostic cycle, for compliance with CARB & EPA OBDII regulations. Left Turn Signal Indicator Light The indicator lights up when the left turn signal or the hazard flashers are turned on. The indicator light will flash at the same frequency of the turn signals and is controlled by the stalk switch lever. If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle drives for more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a continuous sound will alert the driver to turn the signal off. If the indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective exterior light bulb. Tire Pressure Monitoring Light This warning light is connected to the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Under normal conditions, the warning light should illuminate when the ignition switch is in RUN and Dashboard Instruments and Controls should go off once the engine is started. If the warning light remains lit or illuminates while driving, the pressure of one or more tires is too low and a message will be displayed. The TPMS malfunction indicator is connected to the low tire pressure monitoring light. When the system detects a malfunction, the monitoring light and the related message will flash for approximately one minute and then remain lit. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction lasts. When the malfunction indicator lights up, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure correctly. Please refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in section 5 for further information. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light This light, and its related message, indicate possible malfunctions of the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is in RUN position and may stay on for 4 seconds. If the ABS light remains lit or turns on while driving, the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and requires service. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the warning light is switched off. If the ABS light turns on while driving, or if it does not switch on when the ignition switch is in RUN position, please visit an Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as possible to restore the Anti-Lock brake function. NOTE: Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light The ESC activation/ malfunction indicator light on the instrument cluster will display when the ignition switch is in RUN position. It should switch off by starting the engine. If the light stays on with the engine running, there is a malfunction in the ESC system. If the light still stays on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven for several kilometers at more than 30 mph (48 km/h) speed, visit an Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and serviced. Each time the ignition switch is in RUN: • The ESC off indicator light and the ESC activation/malfunction indicator light illuminates temporarily. • When the ESC is functioning, the system will make buzzing or clicking sounds. This is normal. The sounds will stop once ESC becomes inactive and the road conditions that caused the ESC activation no longer persist. 4 This light indicates that the Electronic Stability Control is disabled. The related message will be displayed. 139 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Warning Indicators on Rev Counter Following indicator lights and linked messages are displayed on the Rev Counter on sector 1 of the display (see “TFT Display” in this chapter). This indicator lights up when the rear fog light is switched on. High Beam Indicator This indicator lights up when the high beams are switched on or when are flashed by using the multifunction lever. Push the left multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam function, and pull toward yourself (back to normal position) to reset the low beams. 4 Malfunction messages will be stored in “Stored Messages” (see example in picture). 140 Rear Fog Light Indicator Brake Indicator Light This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake engagement. If the brake light illuminates the parking brake may be engaged, the brake fluid level mat be low or a problem with the anti-lock brake system (ABS) reservoir may have occurred. In all the above situations, a related message will be displayed. If the light still illuminates when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, there could be a brake hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the brake booster detected by the ABS/ESC system. If this occurs, the light will remain lit until the problem has been solved. If the problem concerns the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when engaging the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop of the vehicle. Inefficiency of one of the dual brake system cycle is indicated by the brake warning light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a certain level. The light will remain lit until the problem has been diagnosed and serviced. If a brake failure occurs, visit the Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as possible in order to have the brake system checked and serviced. In the event of an Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) failure, both the brake indicator light and the ABS light illuminate. Immediate repair of the ABS system is required. Functioning of the brake warning light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from OFF to RUN position. Dashboard Instruments and Controls The light should illuminate for approximately 2 seconds. The light should switch off unless the parking brake is engaged or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the warning light checked by an Authorized Maserati Dealer. The light will also switch on when the parking brake is engaged with the ignition switch in RUN position. This light only indicates the brake is engaged but not the clamping force of the parking brake to the wheels. To fully engage the parking brake, please refer to “Parking Brake” in section 5. RUN. If the light does not illuminate while starting the engine, stays lit, or switches on while driving, have the system checked at an Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as possible. In the latter case, the message will remain displayed: to hide it, press ◄ on the steering wheel right side. Right Turn Signal Indicator This indicator lights up when the right turn signals or the hazard flashers are switched on. The indicator will flash at the same frequency of the turn signals and is controlled by the turn signal lever. If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle drives for more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a continuous sound will advise the driver to turn the signal off. If the indicator flashes at a fast rate, check for a defective outside indicator light bulb. 4 Seat Belt Reminder Light WARNING! Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on could be very dangerous and is not recommended. Part of the brake system may have failed, resulting in increased braking distances and the risk of an accident. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an Authorized Maserati Dealer. Air Bag Indicator Light This light will illuminate for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition switch is in See “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) – Air bags” in section 2 for further information. WARNING! If the warning light remains ON or if it does not illuminate or illuminates while driving, contact your Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as possible. When the ignition switch is in RUN, the seat belt reminder light will light up for a few seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, you will hear an acoustic signal if one or both front seat belts are unbuckled. After the bulb check or while driving, if a seat belt remains unbuckled, the seat belt reminder light will illuminate in addition to the acoustic signal and a message will indicate which belt is unbuckled. 141 Dashboard Instruments and Controls TFT Display 4 WARNING! Maserati urges you to use the seat belts correctly fastened and adjusted at all times. Correct use of the seat belts can help reduce the risk of serious injury in the event of an accident. Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They could tear. Do not pin anything to the seat belts. This could reduce their initial strength and cause them to tear in the event of a crash. Position within the submenus and scroll arrows (example: 1 of 5). There can be maximum 9 displayable submenu positions. When the number of submenu points exceeds 9, the points are replaced by a numerical value within the scroll arrows (in the example: 12). 5 Submenu Titles. 6 Menu Instruction. 7 (P, R, N, D, M) shift position indicator. 8 Sport or Normal driving mode. 9 Gear engaged. 10 Complete Odometer. 11 Engine Temperature Gauge. 12 Fuel Gauge. 13 Distinctive Quadrants for indicators according to priority and function (see “Indicators on Display” in this chapter). When operating, the TFT Display is divided into sectors including menus and sub-menus, running data, warning lights and messages. The different sectors of the display layout are shown in the following picture. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in section 2 for further information. 142 4 1 Main area. 2 User-selectable information (data, time, temperature, compass, etc.). 3 Main menu titles with scroll arrows. Dashboard Instruments and Controls The display background may change according to the type of message displayed. • Blue color: normal conditions. • Yellow color: low-critical warning. • Red color: high-critical warning. Main- and Submenu Operate the controls on the right side of the steering wheel to scroll, modify and program the Main- and Submenu. Press and release the switch (►) to enter the information screens or a submenu. Keep the switch (►) pressed for 2 seconds to restore the selected/displayed functions. The sub-menu title selected will be displayed in sector 5 (Submenu Title). Within a submenu, press and release the ▲ and ▼arrow buttons to scroll through the menu. Press the ◄ button to return to the main menu from an item of interest or from an information screen. 4 Press and release the multifunction switch in the ▲ and ▼ arrow directions to scroll upwards and downwards the main menu titles. The main screen area in sector 1 (Menu Area) will be updated and the selected title will be shown in sector 3 (Main Menu Title). 143 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Main Menu & Submenu Content Overview Pos. 4 144 Main menu Submenus 1. DIGITAL SPEED SPEEDOMETER From mph to km/h or vice versa 2. VEHICLE INFO Individual Tire Pressure Monitor 3. FUEL ECONOMY Current, Range, Average TRIP A Distance, Average, Avg. speed, Elapsed Time 5. TRIP B Distance, Average, Avg. speed, Elapsed Time 6. AUDIO Current media Source and track 7. STORED MESSAGES Example: Coolant Low 8. SCREEN SETUP Cluster upper left Cluster upper Restore Defaults information right information 9. VEHICLE SETTINGS Electric Parking Brake Disable 4. Transmission Temperature Set Speed Warning Oil Temperature Oil Pressure AWD Torque Distribution (V6 Engine only) Dashboard Instruments and Controls 1. DIGITAL SPEED — SPEEDOMETER Press and release the central switch in the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions until "Digital Speed" is displayed. Pressing and releasing the switch (►) will toggle the unit of measure between mph or km/h. Press and release the ◄ button to return to the main menu. 2. VEHICLE INFO Press and release the switch in the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions until "Vehicle Info" is displayed. Press and release the switch (►) to access the submenu. Press and release the switch in the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions to scroll through the following information displays and in the (►) arrow direction to visualize the selected information. • Individual tire pressure monitor Indicates the pressure of each individual tire (see example below). Please refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in section 5 for further information. • Transmission temperature Displays the current transmission temperature. • Oil Temperature Displays the current engine oil temperature. • Oil Pressure Displays the current engine oil pressure (see example). • AWD Torque Distribution (V6 Engine) Display a vehicle icon with torque distribution in front and rear axle and “AWD” if all wheel drive is active. Displays “RWD” if all wheel drive is inactive. 4 V6 Engine Press and release the ◄ button to return to the main menu. 145 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 3. FUEL ECONOMY Press and release the switch in the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions until "Fuel Economy" is displayed. 4 The screen will display the following: • Current fuel economy in mpg or l/100km Shows the instantaneous fuel economy. • Range in miles or km Shows the range since the last fuel average reset. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read “Reset” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset. 146 • Fuel economy average in mpg or l/100km Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. Press the central switch (►) for 1 second and release to reset the Fuel Economy “Average”. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read “Reset” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset. Press and release the ◄ button to return to the main menu. 4. TRIP A – 5. TRIP B Press and release the switch in the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions until "Trip A" or “Trip B” is displayed. The screen will display the following: • Distance traveled in miles or km Shows the total covered distance since the last reset. • Average consumption in mpg or l/100km Shows the average fuel consumption since the last reset. • Average speed in mph or km/h Shows the average speed since the last reset. • Elapsed Time Shows the total time of travel since the last reset in “hours:minutes:seconds” Elapsed Time will increment when the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position. Press the central switch (►) for 1 second and release to reset Trip A or Trip B. Press and release the ◄ button to return to the main menu. Dashboard Instruments and Controls 6. AUDIO Press and release the switch in the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions until “Audio” is displayed. 7. STORED MESSAGES The display will show the audio status (source and information) as set on the MTC. It is possible to display up to 13 alphanumeric characters. Displays Audio Status are: Press and release the central switch in the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions until “Stored Messages” is displayed. The system will either display the number of the stored messages (if any available) or “No Stored Messages” as shown in picture. Press and release the switch in the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions to scroll the stored messages. When the number of messages exceeds 9, the submenu points will be replaced by a numerical value indicating the message number. Press and release the switch (►) to view the selected message (for example “Transmission too Hot”). Press and release the ◄ button to return to the main menu. 4 • AM: Frequency; • FM: Frequency, Station provided info; • CD: Track info; • UCI/BTSA with metadata: Artist, Song, Album. Press and release the ◄ button to return to the main menu. 147 Dashboard Instruments and Controls • OK. • Cancel. For the “Upper Right” and “Upper Left” titles there are following options: 8. SCREEN SETUP Press and release the switch in the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions until “Screen Setup” is displayed. Press and release the switch (►) to access the submenu. If the vehicle exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h), this feature is locked out and the main screen shows “Screen Setup Unavailable While in Motion”. Scroll the positions on the menu with the switch in the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions: 4 • None. • Compass. • Outside Temperature. • Date. • Time (see picture). • Restore Defaults. • Upper Right (see picture). Operate this function with the vehicle stopped and transmission in P (Park) position. In order to enter a function, press the switch (►) as shown in the picture. • Upper Left. Press and release the central switch (►) to view the options related to the menu title selected. For the “Restore Defaults” title there are following options: 148 • Time & Date. • Range to Empty. • Average fuel consumption MPG (or L/100km). • Current fuel consumption MPG (or L/100km). • Trip A Distance. • Trip B Distance. Dashboard Instruments and Controls Scroll with the switch in the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions to view the selectable item. A check mark will remain next to the previously selected item until a new selection is made. Press and release the switch (►) to select an item. “Setting Saved” notification appears as a popup for 2 seconds, then the display will show the last modified item. The images show the default items, which are also displayed on the upper part of the MTC. 9. VEHICLE SETTINGS Press and release the switch in the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions until “Vehicle Settings” is displayed. Press and release the switch (►) to access the submenu. If the vehicle exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h), this feature is locked out and the main screen shows “Vehicle Settings Unavailable While in Motion”. 4 Press and release the ◄ button to return to the main menu. Operate this function with the vehicle stopped and transmission in P (Park) position. In order to enter a function, press the switch (►) as shown in the picture. 149 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Example: How to modify the Speed Warning Status Scroll with the switch in the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions to view the selectable items. Press and release the switch (►) to select “Speed Warning”. 4 Scroll with the switch in the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions to view the selectable options. Speed values are in loop, keeping the switch pressed in the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions will increase scroll speed. Press and release the switch (►) to select the option. A check mark will remain next to the previously selected item until a new selection is made. Scroll with the switch in the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions to view the selectable items: • Electric Park Brake. • Speed Warning. NOTE: In order to modify the “Electric Park Brake” function, please see chapter “Parking Brake” in section 5. Press and release the switch (►) once again to view the related options: “Off” is the default status. The “Setting Saved” notification appears as a popup for 2 seconds, then the display will show the last modified item. 150 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Examples of this message type are "Right Front Turn Signal Light Out" and "Tire Pressure” low (as shown in the picture). When the set speed is exceeded, the driver is alerted by an acoustic signal, a telltale indicating the speed limit, and a pop-up message indicating that the limit has been exceeded. The pop-up message and the telltale will be displayed for 5 seconds before returning to the previous menu. Messages on Main Display Area The main display area also displays "pop up" messages. These pop up messages fall into several categories: • Five-Second Stored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message appears on the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the condition that activated it remains active) and can be reviewed from the "Stored Messages" main menu item. As long as there is a stored message, an "i" will be displayed in the compass/outside temp sector. 4 • Unstored Messages This message type is displayed until the condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples of this message type are "Turn Signal On" (if a turn signal is left on) and "Lights On" (if the driver leaves the vehicle). 151 Dashboard Instruments and Controls • Unstored Messages with Ignition Switch in RUN This message type is displayed until the ignition switch is in RUN position. An example of this message type is "Press Brake and Push Button to Start" (as shown in the picture). • Five-Second-displayed Navigation Messages When the navigation menu is enabled on the MTC, information pop ups will be displayed for 5 seconds while changing direction or approaching a turning point. On highway, the first pop up will be displayed at 2 miles (3.2 km) from the turn, on roadway, at 1 mile (1.6 km). 4 • Five-Second Unstored Messages When appropriate conditions occur, this type of message appears on the main display area for five seconds then returns to the previous screen. Examples of this message type are "Memory System Unavailable Vehicle Not in Park" and "Automatic High Beams Enabled". 152 While approaching the turn, further pop ups will be displayed starting at 430 yd (400 m) from the turning point and the countdown to 0 miles (meters). Warning Lights on Display NOTE: • In sector 13 of the display more telltales are displayed while dedicated messages are shown on sector 1 for 5 seconds, unless otherwise indicated. • Malfunction messages will be saved in “Stored Messages”. Dashboard Instruments and Controls Charging System Warning Light This telltale shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the telltale stays on or comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle's non-essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system telltale remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. IMMEDIATELY contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer to have the vehicle serviced. If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Start Procedures” in section 6. Automatic Transmission Failure Indicator This indicator and related displayed message, indicate transmission failure. If the failure permits, slowly drive to the nearest Maserati Service Center. Engine Temperature Warning Light This warning light notifies when the engine is overheated. As temperature rises and the gage displayed in sector 11 approaches “H”, this warning light will illuminate combined with the related displayed message, and triggering and acoustic signal by reaching the set threshold. If the warning light switches on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into N (Neutral) and idle the vehicle. If the temperature does not return to normal, immediately turn the engine off and contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer. Check “Engine Overheating” in section 6 for more information. Low Oil Pressure Indicator Under normal conditions, the warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to RUN and goes off as soon as the engine is started. If the warning light stays or turns on while driving, the engine oil pressure is too low. The warning light is combined with a displayed message and an acoustic signal that will last 4 minutes. In this case, turn the engine off immediately and carry out the necessary checks. Do not operate the vehicle until the problem has been checked and serviced. This light does not indicate the oil level. The engine oil level must be checked with the dipstick located under the engine hood (see “Maintenance Procedures” in section 7). If the problem persists, contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer. Engine Oil Temperature Indicator This light indicates that the engine oil is overheated. The indicator is combined with the related displayed message. In this case, drive carefully until the temperature drops back to normal level and the indicator light turns off. If the problem persists, contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer. 4 Low Engine Oil Level Indicator This indicator and the related displayed message, indicate a low engine oil level. The engine oil level must be checked with the dipstick fitted under the engine lid (see “Maintenance Procedures” in section 7). Power Steering Failure Warning Light This warning light, and the related message, illuminate when the Electric Power Steering is not operating and needs service. If the problem persists, contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer. 153 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Indicator 4 154 This light combined to the related message displayed on sector 1 for 5 seconds, indicates a failure of the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If the indicator turns on while driving, have the system checked by the Authorized Maserati Dealer. When detecting a failure, the light indicator will illuminate while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition switch when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in P (Park) position: the light indicator should turn off. If the indicator remains lit with the engine running, you can still drive your vehicle. However, contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as possible. If the indicator is flashing while the engine is running, immediate service is required. You may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. Catalyst Over Temperature Indicator This warning light, and the related message, light up if the engine runs irregularly with consequent high temperature in the exhaust system. WARNING! • If the warning light is accompanied by the message “Catalyst Temp Getting Hot Reduce Speed”: the temperature of the catalytic converters is too high. The driver must slow down immediately until the warning light turns off. • If the message “Catalyst Temp Hot Stop Safely Wait To Cool” appears after decelerating: the temperature in the catalytic converters has reached an abnormal level and the catalytic converters could be damaged. Drive slowly to the nearest workshop. • If the light turns on permanently 3 times the engine will stop. It will be possible to restart the vehicle only after a key-off / key-on cycle. Then slowly drive to the nearest Maserati Service Center. • Maserati is not responsible for damage deriving from noncompliance with the above mentioned warnings. Door Ajar Indicator This indicator illuminates when one or more doors are ajar. The indicator will show which door is ajar. When one or more doors are open, a related message will be displayed if the vehicle is running at speed 5 mph (8 km/h) or faster. Trunk and Engine Lid Ajar Indicators These light indicators will illuminate to indicate that the trunk or engine lid is ajar. When the trunk or engine compartment is open, a related message will be displayed with the warning indicator if the vehicle is running at speed 5 mph (8 km/h) or faster. Dashboard Instruments and Controls Low Fuel Indicator When the fuel level reaches approximately 4.2 Gallons (16.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added; the related message will also be displayed. Refer to “Refueling” in section 5 for fuel filling. Windshield and Headlights Washer Low Fluid Indicator This indicator will illuminate for 5 seconds to indicate a low level of the windshield and headlamp washer fluid. A related message will be displayed. See “Maintenance Procedures” in section 7 for fluid filling. Adaptive Light Control System Failure This indicator, and the related message, indicate a failure of the automatic headlight aiming system. Please contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer to check the system. Suspension Failure Indicator This indicator light and the related message turn on during driving if there is a failure of the suspension Please contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer to check the system. with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire. Transmission Temperature Warning Light Ice Hazard Warning Light This warning light and the related message indicate that the transmission fluid temperature is rising. If this warning light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into P (Park) and run the engine at idle or faster until the temperature drops and the light switches off. If the problem persists, contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer. CAUTION! Continuous driving with the transmission temperature warning light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or failure. WARNING! If the transmission temperature warning light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle, in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact When the external temperature falls below 37°F (3°C), the temperature value blinks for a few seconds, the warning light turns on, a message is displayed and an acoustic signal is triggered to warn the driver of the risk of icy roadbed. Under such conditions, we recommend to use the I C E drive mode (see “Automatic Transmission” in section 5) drive carefully and slow down as the grip of the tires may be significantly reduced. The warning light flashes for 5 seconds and switches off when the temperature reaches 43°F (6°C) or higher. 4 Brake Pads Wear Warning Light This warning light and the related message indicate that the brake pads have reached their wear limit. Please contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer to have them replaced. system. 155 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Electric Parking Brake Failure Warning Light 4 156 This warning light and related message illuminate when there is an EPB system failure. The failure could also completely or partially block the vehicle because the parking brake could remain on even after it has been automatically or manually disengaged though its controls. In this situation it is possible to release the parking brake by following the emergency release procedure as indicated in chapter “Emergency Release of the Parking Brake” in Section 6. If it is still possible to use the vehicle (parking brake not engaged) drive to the nearest Authorized Maserati Dealer and remember to performing each operation/command that the electric parking brake is not functioning. Oil Change Required Indicator The “Oil Change Required” message flashes on the display for approximately 5 seconds after an acoustic signal and it indicates that the next scheduled oil change is due. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate according to your personal driving style. Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you cycle the ignition to the RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the ◄ button. To reset the oil change indicator system please visit a Maserati Service Center. Indicators in Sector 13 of the Display Cruise Control, lights on and gear shift indicators are displayed in sector 13 on the right side of the total odometer. Speed Limit Exceeded Warning Light Electronic Cruise Control ON Indicator This warning light and related message illuminate when the set speed limit is exceeded (in the example shown: 40 mph or km/h). This light indicator and related message will illuminate when the electronic cruise control is ON. For further information, check “Electronic Cruise Control” in section 5. Electronic Cruise Control in Stand-by Indicator This light indicator and related message will illuminate when the electronic cruise control is in stand-by. For further information, check “Electronic Cruise Control” in section 5. Electronic Cruise Control SET Indicator This light indicator and related message will illuminate when the electronic cruise control is SET. For further information, check “Electronic Cruise Control” in section 5. Park/Headlight On Indicator This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on. For further information, see “Lights” in section 3. Gear Shift Indicator Light This indicator lights up to indicate gear shift change in order to optimize fuel consumption, see “Drive Mode” in section 5 for further information. Dashboard Instruments and Controls Service AWD System Message (V6 Engine) Infotainment System The message on the TFT display will illuminate when all wheel drive feature requires service. For further information, refer to “All-Wheel Drive” in section 5. The vehicle is equipped with the infotainment Maserati Touch Control (MTC) System, an advanced user interface which combines innovative and exclusive technical features integrating entertainment, user settings, air conditioning, navigation, communication and information features within a single system. The MTC System features an audio system which is acoustically optimized for this specific vehicle. V6 Engine This vehicle is provided with a description of the MTC System features and listing of warnings and precautions, which are essential for safe use of the system. Maserati advises you to read this addendum carefully and thoroughly. 4 WARNING! The navigation system assists the driver while driving, providing advice and suggestions, by voice guidance and graphic information, for the best route to reach the set destination. The suggestions provided by the navigation system do not relieve the driver from full responsibility for the maneuvers made through traffic while driving, or from compliance with road regulations and other provisions regarding road traffic. The person driving the vehicle is always and in any case responsible for safe driving on the road. 157 Dashboard Instruments and Controls MTC Controls Hard Keys MTC System has a series of tools, controls and soft-keys that are designed to use external multimedia resources and different audio options, to change settings and to perform other functions. All controls are positioned in the central part of the dashboard. • SD Card slot Insert an SD Card containing any navigation information, perform navigation functions and play media files (music and images). 1 ON/OFF and Volume control. 2 Enter/Browse and Tune/Scroll knob. 3 Card slot. 4 CD/DVD slot. 5 “Radio” soft-key. 6 “Player” soft-key. 7 “Controls” soft-key. 8 “Climate” soft-key. 9 “Nav” soft-key. 10 “Phone” soft-key. 11 “Settings” soft-key. 4 158 • CD/DVD slot To be used when in Player mode. When inserting a disc, make sure the label is facing up. Press the lateral button to eject the disc. • ON/OFF and Volume Press the central button (1) to turn the unit on or off. Rotate the external regulator on the central button (1) to adjust the volume. If the ignition is switched off (ignition switch in OFF) with the radio in stand-by mode, the radio Dashboard Instruments and Controls memorizes the stand-by mode for recall at the next ignition cycle. Press the central button to turn the radio on. It is possible to eject the CD and to display the time if the system is off. The navigation software is always working when the ignition is switched on, even if the radio is in standby mode. • Enter/Browse and Tune/Scroll Press the central button to accept a highlighted selection on the screen. Rotate the external regulator to scroll through a list or tune a radio station. Touch-Screen Keys The soft keys located on the lower part of the MTC display, enable different function modes as briefly indicated below. For further information refer to the dedicated booklet included in the owner documentation. • Radio soft-key (5) Press the Radio soft-key to enter the Radio mode. The different tuner modes: AM, FM and SAT can be selected by touching the related soft-keys in the Radio mode. • Player soft-key (6) Press the Player soft-key to access media sources such as: Disc, USB Device and AUX as long as the requested media is present. • Controls soft-key (7) Press the Controls soft-key to access the Settings list. Controls such as; Heated Seats, Heated Steering Wheel, Ventilated Seats, etc. can be selected or turned ON/OFF by touching the related soft-key. • Climate soft-key (8) Press the Climate soft-key to access the air conditioning settings. See “Air Conditioning Controls” in this section for further details. • Nav soft-key (9) Press the Nav soft-key to access the Navigation feature. • Phone soft-key (10) Press the Phone soft-key to access the MTC Phone feature. • Settings soft-key (11) Press the Settings soft-key to access the list of settings. Audio Controls The vehicle is equipped with audio controls that allow both driver and front passenger to operate the audio system without using the touch-screen keys on the MTC display. These controls can be used to adjust audio volume, change radio station or mode (AM, FM, CD, etc). Steering Wheel Audio Controls The sound system controls are rocker-type switches with a button in the center and are located on the rear side of the steering wheel, right behind the front switches. The right-hand control manages volume and mode of the sound system. By pressing the top of the rocker switch you can increase the volume, and by pressing the bottom of the rocker switch you can lower it. Press the center button to switch radio mode (AM, FM, CD, etc.). The left-hand control functions depend on the current mode set with the right-hand control, and are the following ones. 4 159 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Rotate the regulation knob clockwise to increase volume, counter-clockwise to lower volume. Rotate the right knob to scroll through the menus and change the user’s settings (see “MTC Settings” in section 4). Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next received station and pressing the bottom of the switch will seek down for the next received station. The button fitted in the center of the left-hand control will tune to the next preset station set on the MTC preset button. 4 160 CD Player MTC Side Audio Controls A light press on the top of the switch will play the next track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play. If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the second track; three times, it will play the third, etc. The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single-disc CD player. However, if the vehicle is equipped with a multiple-disc CD player, the center button will select the next available CD in the player. On both sides of the MTC display there are two rotating devices (knobs) with a central button. Press the central button on the left side to turn the MTC on and off; rotate the knob to set the audio volume. Dashboard Instruments and Controls Audio System The vehicle is equipped with an audio system that offers superior sound quality, higher sound pressure levels and reduced energy consumption. The new system maximizes the amplifier and speaker technology delivering substantially higherperforming components and system efficiency. The standard sound system "Premium" features 10 speakers and can develop a sound output of 760 W. The standard system includes: • 6.5 in (165 mm) CFR Woofer: 2 x 165 mm in the front doors. • 6.5 in (165 mm) Black Kevlar Woofer: 2 x 165 mm in the rear doors. • 4 in (100 mm) Yellow Kevlar Midrange: 1 x center dashboard, 2 x in the front doors, 2 x L/R surround. • 1 in (25 mm) MMX Tweeter: 1 x Center, 2 x on the dashboard L/R, 2 x in the rear doors. • 13.7 x 7.9 in (350 x 200 mm) Racetrack Sub Dual VC: 1 x on the rear parcel shelf. • 16-channel 1280 Watts Class-D amplifier in the trunk. The system is supplied with a 12 channel high efficiency amplifier and is operated by a high voltage tracking power supply and drives a 7.5-channel playback architecture. This audio system offers the ability to choose 4 • Four 6.5 in (165 mm) diameter Woofers, one on each door. • One 3.15 in (80 mm) diameter Midrange diameter, on the top of the dashboard. • One 1 in (25 mm) diameter Tweeter, 2 on the upper edges of the dashboard and 2 on rear doors. • One 7x10 in (180x250 mm) Subwoofer on the rear panel below the rear window. The vehicle can be equipped with an "High Premium" audio system including 15 speakers and 1280 W of sound power, available upon request. The optional “High Premium” sound system includes: 161 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 162 Logic 7® surround sound for any audio source. The high-efficiency speaker design ensures higher Sound Pressure Level (SPL) and exceptional dynamic sound quality. The speakers are tuned for maximum efficiency and compatible with the amplifier output stage ensuring best updated surround sound processing. Logic 7® multichannel surround sound technology delivers an immersive, accurate sound stage throughout the passenger compartment. This surround effect is available from any audio source - AM/FM/CD/Satellite Radio or AUX input; and is activated through the MTC System controls. By selecting “Audio Surround”, you can activate the Logic 7® multichannel surround-sound technology in your vehicle. All information on the current operational mode are listed in the specific booklet included in the on board documentation. The driver selectable “Video Surround” mode (DSS) is available only for video media sources (DVDs, Video CDs, or other video media supported by the radio). Some audio will sound better in “DSS” modes, some other in “Stereo” mode. When in “Audio Surround” mode, balance is set automatically. Fader control is available in surround mode but it should be set to the center position for optimal surround performance. MTC Settings The MTC System uses a combination of keys able to access and change the customer programmable features. Touch-screen keys are displayed on the lower part of the MTC display positioned centrally on the dashboard. There is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the MTC display. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the button in the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF). NOTE: For further details refer to the Maserati Touch Control guide. Dashboard Instruments and Controls Customer Programmable Features — MTC Settings Press the Settings soft-key to display the programmable features menu. In this mode the MTC System allows you to access following programmable features (some of them are optional and may not be available on your vehicle): Display, Clock & Date, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth and SIRIUS XM Setup. NOTE: Only one touchscreen area or key may be selected at a time. To make a selection, and enter the desired function, press the corresponding soft-key on the menu (the picture shown is “Doors and Locks”). To scroll through the functions, move the cursor up or down, or press the arrow ▼ or ▲. Once the desired mode is entered, press and release the touch-screen area of the setting that you wish to modify. The new setting will be highlighted with one or more boxes to indicate status or possible variants of the function status. A check mark in a box indicates the current status of the function. Press the checkmark to cancel, or the empty box to insert the check mark, and change the status of the function. Once the procedure is completed (for example, Display mode) press the ◄ back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu or press the upper right X soft-key, to close the settings screen. Pressing the ▲ or ▼ soft keys and the cursor on the right side of the screen will allow you to scroll up or down through the available settings. 4 163 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Display After pressing the Display soft-key the following mode settings will be available. • Display mode When in this display you can select one of the auto display settings. To change mode status, touch and release the Day, Night or Auto soft-key. 4 • Display Brightness with Headlights On When in this display, you can select the brightness with the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and – setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – soft-keys. 164 • Display Brightness with Headlights Off When in this display, you can select the brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness as previously explained. • Set language When in this display, you can select one of available languages for all display descriptions, including the trip functions and the navigation system. • Units When in this display, you can select between US and Metric units of measurement in the instrument cluster, odometer and navigation system. The speed unit, shown in digital format on the TFT display of the instrument cluster, is defined and modifiable through the controls located on the right side of the steering wheel (see “TFT Display” in chapter “Instrument Cluster” of this section). • Voice Response Length When in this display, you can change the voice response length settings. To change the voice response length, touch the Brief or Detailed soft-key. • Touchscreen Beep When in this display, you can turn on or shut off the sound activated by pressure of a touch screen button (soft-key). • Control Screen Time-Out Use this mode to operate the timing of the control screen display. • Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed on Cluster By selecting this feature, the turn-by-turn directions will appear on the instrument cluster along a programmed route until the desired destination is reached (see picture). Dashboard Instruments and Controls • Set Time Minutes When in this mode, you can set the minutes manually. To select, touch the + or – soft-keys as done for the hours. Clock & Date Time is always visible on the dashboard analog clock and in digital format on the instrument cluster and on the MTC display. With this feature it is possible to view and set the following modes. • Sync with GPS or Radio Time When in this mode, time is automatically set and synchronized to the GPS or radio signal. • Set Time Hours When in this mode, you can set the hours manually. To select, touch the + or – soft-keys to adjust the hours. • Time Format When in this mode, you can select the time format display. To change the current setting, touch and release the 12 Hrs or 24 Hrs button. • Set Date in Cluster (MM/DD/YY) When in this mode, you can set the date manually in the status bar of the MTC and on the instrument panel display. 4 Safety & Driving Assistance Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key to set the following modes. • Park Assist The rear park assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in R (Reverse) and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound only, Sound + Display, or turned Off. See “ParkSense® Park Assist” in section 2 for further information. 165 Dashboard Instruments and Controls • Rain Sensing Auto Wipers By selecting this feature, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield. Lights Press the Lights soft-key to set the following modes. 4 • Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse By selecting this feature the outside side-view mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in R (Reverse) position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of R (Reverse). • ParkView Backup Camera This vehicle is equipped with the ParkView® rear backup camera which allows you to see an image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is set in R (Reverse). The image will be displayed on the MTC display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings”. See “ParkSense® Park Assist” in section 2 for further information. 166 • Headlights Off Delay By selecting this feature, the driver can choose to have the headlights off or lit for 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the current headlight off delay status, touch and release the 0, 30, 60 or 90 soft-key to select the desired time range. • Headlights Illumination on Approach By selecting this feature, the driver can choose to have the headlights off or lit for 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the key fob RKE transmitter. • Headlights with Wipers By selecting this feature, while the headlight lever is in “AUTO” position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are activated. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers deactivate if they were activated in the current mode. • Auto Dim High Beams By selecting this feature, the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. See “Lights” in section 3 for further information. • Daytime Running Lights When this feature is selected, the DRL lights will turn on whenever the engine is running. To make your selection, touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key, until a Dashboard Instruments and Controls transmitter button. When 1st press of key fob unlocks is selected, you must press the key fob RKE transmitter button twice to unlock the passenger's doors. When unlock all doors by 1st press selection mode, all doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob RKE transmitter button. check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. • Steering Directed Headlights By selecting this feature, the headlights rotate following the steering wheel direction change. • Headlights Dip (Traffic Changeover) By selecting this feature, the headlights will change their luminous distribution when a left-hand-drive vehicle enter a Country with right-hand-drive system and vice versa. • Flash Lamps with Lock By selecting this feature, the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob RKE transmitter. Doors & Locks Press the Doors & Locks soft-key to set the following modes. • Auto Door Locks This feature allows you to lock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to press the key fob RKE transmitter button. See “Passive Entry System” in section 2. • Auto Unlock on Exit By selecting this feature, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position and the driver's door is open. • Flash Lamps with Lock By selecting this feature, the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob RKE transmitter. • Sound Horn with Lock By selecting this feature, the horn will sound when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob RKE transmitter. NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed on 1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks: • all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped; • only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped; • with Passive Entry, touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening. 4 If driver door first is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob RKE transmitter). • 1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks By operating the 1st Press of the Key Fob Unlocks mode you may set up only the driver's door will unlock on the first press of the key fob RKE 167 Dashboard Instruments and Controls • Passive Entry By selecting this feature, Passive Entry may be programmed to on or off. The default status is on. With Passive Entry deactivated, also the “Pre-Short Drop” function is disabled (for further information, refer to “Bodywork Maintenance and Care” in section 7). 4 • Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob By selecting this mode, the key fob can be programmed with the driver’s personal position settings. These settings will be implemented when pressing the button on the remote control. Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start By pressing the Auto-on Comfort soft-key the following setting will be available. • Auto-on Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel with Vehicle Start By selecting this feature the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically activate when the temperature is below 40°F (4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26°C) the driver vented seat will turn on. 168 Engine Off This feature allows certain functions after turning off the engine. • Easy Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. • Engine off Power Delay (Power duration after engine shutdown) By selecting this feature, the power window switches, radio, MTC System, DVD video system (for versions/markets, where provided), power sunroof, and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is cycled to OFF. Opening of one front door will cancel this feature. The switch-off delay can be canceled (0 seconds) or reduced to 5 minutes or 45 seconds. • Headlights off delay By selecting this feature the headlights will stay lit for up to 90 seconds after turning off the engine. The switch-off delay can be canceled (0 seconds) or reduced to 60 or 30 seconds. Audio This feature enables to view and set the available audio modes depending on the type of audio system supplied on the car. The following modes refer to the “High Premium” audio system. Dashboard Instruments and Controls • Balance/Fade Use this screen to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. • Speed Adjusted Volume This feature increases or decreases volume combined to vehicle speed. To change the speed adjusted volume touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. • Surround Sound (only for “High Premium” audio system) This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. To make your selection, press Stereo, Audience or On Stage. 4 • Equalizer Use this screen to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – soft-keys. • Music Info Cleanup This feature helps organizing music files for optimized music navigation. Phone/Bluetooth Press the Phone/Bluetooth soft-key to select and connect phones and audio sources. • Paired Phones • Paired Audio Sources By selecting one of these options you will be notified which phones or which audio sources are combined to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For each option, you can also add a device and change the PIN code of the device you wish to connect. For further information, see the MTC guide. 169 Dashboard Instruments and Controls NOTE: On the Maserati website, at www.maserati.com, or through the Authorized Maserati Dealer you may consult the list of telephones that are compatible with the MTC, and their level of compatibility. 4 SIRIUS XM Setup After pressing the SIRIUS XM Setup soft-key the following settings will be available. • Channel Skip SIRIUS XM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select the channels you 170 would like to skip followed by pressing the arrow ◄ soft-key. • Subscription Information SIRIUS XM Satellite radio requires a user-paid subscription to access these stations. It will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information Screen in order to subscribe. Touch the Subscription Info soft key to access your receiver ID number. Write down the SIRIUS XM ID numbers for your radio. To activate SIRIUS XM service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit SIRIUS XM online at www.siriusxm.com\subscriptions or call the number listed. Slot for SD Memory Card and CD/DVD Both slots are located on the center of the dashboard, under the air conditioning system control devices. To insert a memory card into the slot, lift the tab with the “SD” indication and push it inside the slot. To extract it, press lightly on the card. To insert a CD/DVD push it inside the lower slot with the label on the upper side. To extract it, press the button on the left side of the slot, as indicated. Songs and video played from a SD card or a CD/DVD can be controlled using the touch screen controls on the MTC (see the MTC guide) or the remote controls on the steering wheel (see “Audio Controls” in this section). Dashboard Instruments and Controls Dashboard Compartments There are two glove box compartments on the dashboard to store small items or documents. WARNING! Do not operate the vehicle with a compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music players, and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury. CAUTION! Do not place objects weighing over 22 lb (10 kg) in the glove box compartment. Glove Box Driver Side Glove Box Passenger Side To open the glove box on the driver side, pull the handle as indicated. To open the glove box on the passenger side, pull the handle as shown in the picture. 4 The compartment is ca. 10-12 in (25-30 cm) deep and is lit by two courtesy lights when open (the light automatically switches off when the compartment is closed). The compartment is divided into two parts: in the lower part you can find the Owner’s documentation, while in the upper part you can fit small items. 171 Dashboard Instruments and Controls The compartment is illuminated by a courtesy light when open (the light will automatically switch off when the compartment is closed); moreover, the compartment is also air-conditioned like the rest of the interior. The air outlet inside the compartment is located on the lower right side. Analog Clock Air Conditioning Controls To adjust the analog clock located on the center of the dashboard between the air outlets, use the MTC System (see “MTC Settings” in this section). The vehicle is equipped with an automatic dual-zone air conditioner/ heater that adjusts the air temperature in the passenger compartment, in two separate left and right side zones. Upon request, the vehicle can be equipped with an automatic four-zone air conditioning system: in this case an additional A/C module, operable both by the rear and the front passengers (see “Four-zone Climate Control (optional)” in this chapter), is installed in the central console, between the front seats. A demister system can "control" a specific area of the windshield, through a sensor located behind the rearview mirror, and activate a special function to prevent or eliminate mist. The sensor is enabled upon ignition and whenever the user presses one of the automatic function buttons (AUTO). 4 The time can be visualized also on the MTC status bar and on the instrument cluster display (see “MTC Settings” in this section). Clock backlight functioning is combined with the MTC display and the ignition switch backlight. CAUTION! To help ensure proper functioning of the sensor, do not apply adhesive parking stickers, etc. in the “sensing” area between the sensor and the (Continued) 172 Dashboard Instruments and Controls indicator illuminates when the A/C is on. Operating this function will cause the automatic feature to switch into manual mode and the AUTO LED/Key will turn off. (Continued) windshield. Therefore, keep the windshield and the sensor clean to prevent accumulation of dust or other impurities. Dual Zone Climate Controls This system can be operated by using either the automatic climate control panel on the dashboard, below the MTC display, or the corresponding soft keys on the MTC display. When the MTC System is in any mode other than climate (Radio, Player, Controls, etc.) the driver and passenger temperature settings will be indicated on the upper part of the display. Description of Controls All functions, except the air distribution, MAX A/C and the SYNC mode, can be set and modified using the climate control panel or the MTC display. 1. Climate control on/off Press the button or the OFF key to switch the climate control on/off. The LED on the button and the OFF key will illuminate when the A/C is on. NOTE: For vehicle equipped with Remote Start, the Air Conditioning System will not function during Remote Start operation if the climate control is left in OFF. 3. Driver temperature control Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the ▼ button for cooler temperature. Push the ▲ button for warmer temperature. The driver's temperature setting will be displayed on the MTC screen between the arrows. 4 NOTE: In SYNC mode, this button will also automatically and simultaneously adjust the passenger temperature. 4. Passenger temperature control Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Push the ▼ button for cooler temperature. Push the ▲ button for warmer temperature. The passenger's temperature setting will be displayed on the MTC screen between the arrows. NOTE: 2. A/C Press to change the current air conditioning (A/C) setting; the Pressing the 4 button while in SYNC mode will automatically exit SYNC. 173 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 5. Recirculation Press to change the current setting, the LED indicator on the button/the relevant soft key illuminates when the function is on. 4 6. Blower control Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual. Pushing the “+” on the climate control panel will increase the speed of the blower, while pushing the “-” will decrease it. On the MTC screen, touch the small icon of the blower to decrease the speed, or the big icon to increase it. Between the two icons, bars will appear to show the number of the corresponding selected speed. The blower can also be activated/ regulated by touching the bars between the two blower icons. 7. AUTO This function automatically controls the interior temperature by adjusting the air flow rate and the air distribution. Press the AUTO will cause the ATC to switch between manual and automatic mode. The LED on the button/the AUTO soft key illuminates 174 when the AUTO function is activated. See “Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)” in this chapter for more information. 8. FAST defrosting/demisting Press the button/the soft key to switch the airflow setting to the windshield and the front side windows to get a quick defrosting/defogging. The LED on the button/the soft key illuminates when this feature is activated. Operating this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode: so the AUTO LED/soft key will turn off; the fifth blower speed will be automatically selected, unless the blower is not already set to a higher speed. If this function is turned off the climate system will return to the previous setting. 9. REAR defrosting/demisting Press the button/the soft key to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors. A LED indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster and the heated external mirrors are on. The rear window defroster and the heated external mirrors automatically turn off after 10 minutes. CAUTION! Failure to observe the following cautions may cause damage to the rear windows defroster: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects inside the vehicle at a safe distance from the window. 10. Airflow distribution modes The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the dashboard vents, floor vents, demist/defrost vents. The mode setting keys are located on the MTC display only and allow following setting options: • “Dashboard” mode Air flows in from the four adjustable vents of the dashboard and the two Dashboard Instruments and Controls positioned at the rear of the central console. Each of these vents can be singly adjusted. The air vanes of the vents can be moved up and down or right and left to adjust air flow direction. A setting wheel, placed near each vent, allows to regulate or close the air flow. • “Bi-Level” mode Air comes from the dashboard vents, the central console adjustable vents and the fixed floor vents. A small portion of the airflow is directed through the defrost/demist vents. NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed to let cooler air from the dashboard and rear central console vents and warmer air from the floor vents. • “Floor” mode Air comes from the floor vents. A small portion of the airflow is directed through the defrost/demist vents. • “Mix” mode Air comes from the floor and the defrost/demist vents. This mode is recommended for cold climates, to improve comfort and prevent fogging. 11. “SYNC” mode Press the SYNC soft-key on the MTC to switch the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates when this feature is selected. This function is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature. 12. MAX A/C Pressing the MAX A/C soft key on the MTC, the system automatically switches to get the maximum cold air flow. When the A/C and AUTO are switched off it is not possible to have air at a lower temperature than the outside. Recirculation When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button. The LED on the button/the recirculation soft key will illuminate when this function is selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow the entry of outside air into the air conditioning system. 4 Dual Zone Climate Control Functions Air Conditioning (A/C) The A/C button allows to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the vents into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. 175 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Automatic operation NOTE: 4 In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to window fogging. and increase Select the MIX mode the blower speed to prevent fogging. MAX A/C Activating this function, the system switches to exit AUTO, enter A/C and Recirculation. The minimum temperature (LO) in both zones, the maximum blower speed and the air distribution are also selected. The blower speed can be adjusted and the air distribution can be modified without exiting MAX A/C. To exit MAX A/C press the relevant soft key or exit A/C or Recirculation. Selecting , AUTO, or OFF, will also exit MAX A/C. 176 • Press the AUTO key on the A/C panel or the soft key button on the MTC screen. • Set the desired temperature adjusting the driver and/or passenger temperature hard or soft control buttons. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level. • When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings anymore, simply allow the system to function automatically. • To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode, during cold start-ups the blower speed will remain low until the engine warms up. Manual operation The system allows manual selection of blower speed, air distribution mode, A/C status and Recirculation control. The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control. In this case the blower will operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the AUTO mode. The user can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected. Dashboard Instruments and Controls Four-Zone Climate Control (optional) Air conditioning controls that allow rear passengers to adjust the temperature in the left and right rear part of the passenger compartment are located at the rear of the center console underneath the adjustable air outlets, or on the rear console storage compartment between the rear seats, if the vehicle is equipped with “Comfort Luxury" seats. 2. A/C Press to change the current air conditioning (A/C) setting, the A/C symbol on the button illuminates when the A/C is on. This will cause the automatic operation to switch into manual mode and the AUTO indicator will turn off. “Comfort Luxury" Rear Seats Description of Controls The following functions can be operated/adjusted by using the rear climate control panel. 1. Rear climate control on/off Press the button to switch the rear climate control on/off. The LED on the button turns on when the rear A/C is on. 3. Left side temperature control Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Push the ▼ button for cooler temperature settings or the ▲ button for warmer temperature. The set temperature value will be displayed in the area above the buttons. 4 4. Right side temperature control Provides the rear seats passengers with independent temperature control. Push the ▼ button for cooler temperature settings or the ▲ button for warmer temperature. The set temperature value will be displayed in the area above the buttons. 5. Blower control Blower control is used to regulate the airflow of the rear climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause the automatic mode to switch to manual. 177 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Press the “+” button to increase blower speed. Press the “-” button for lower speed. Airflow distribution modes The airflow distribution can be adjusted to let air come from the central console vents, floor vents, demist/defrost vents on pillars between the doors. The set mode is recognizable through an illuminated LED on the button. 4 6. “Bi-Level” mode Air comes from the adjustable vents on the rear central console and from the fixed ones directed to the floor. A portion of the airflow is directed to the vents on pillars. NOTE: The Bi-Level mode is designed to provide comfort by sending cooler air out of the central console vents and warmer air from the floor vents. 7. “Floor” mode Air comes from the floor vents. A portion of the airflow is directed to the vents on pillars. 8. “Panel” mode Air comes from the adjustable vents on the central console. Each of these vents can be singly adjusted. The air 178 vanes of the vents can be moved up and down or right and left to adjust air flow direction. A setting wheel, placed near each vent, allows to regulate or close the air flow. 9. AUTO This function automatically controls the interior temperature by adjusting the air flow rate and the air distribution. • Press the AUTO button: the automatic rear climate control switches from manual to automatic mode and vice-versa. The AUTO symbol on the button illuminates when this function is activated. • Adjust then the temperature you wish to maintain by regulating the left and/or right side temperature control buttons. Once the desired temperature is set, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level. • When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings anymore: simply allow the system to function automatically. To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode, during cold start-ups the blower speed will remain low until the engine warms up. Four-Zone Climate Control by the Driver By operating the MTC display controls the driver can adjust the settings of the rear climate zones controlled by rear passengers. By touching the following MTC screen keys, the driver is able to: 1. View and change the settings of the rear climate. 2. Block the settings of the rear climate. 3. Synchronize the temperature of the passenger side with the driver's side. 4. Return to the front climate control display. Dashboard Instruments and Controls • Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. Operating Tips • Continuous use of the air recirculation in winter, in rainy weather or humid climate is not recommended because it may cause window fogging. • Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by FAST defrosting/demisting. The “Mix” mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed. NOTE: • Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves or other objects. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In winter make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow. • The climate control system filters outside air containing dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out. See “Maintenance Procedures” in section 7 for filter replacement instructions. • The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units by selecting the US/M customer programmable feature. See “MTC Settings” in this section. • Any time you store your vehicle or keep it stationary (i.e., during vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air by high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication and minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. 4 • Recirculation mode without A/C should not be used for long periods of time, as fogging may occur. 179 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Phone and Voice Controls on Steering Wheel WARNING! Any voice-controlled system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable regulations. All attention should be kept on driving. Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death. The controls on the right side of the steering wheel activate/deactivate the phone mode and the voice control functions. 4 These functions are only available when one or more Bluetooth® compatible mobile phones are paired with the MTC System connection: to pair a phone and to learn all available functions refer to the MTC guide. NOTE: On the Maserati website, at www.maserati.com, or through the Authorized Maserati Dealer you may consult the list of telephones that are compatible with the MTC, and their level of compatibility. 180 The voice command communication system is fully integrated with the vehicle's audio system. The volume can be adjusted from the radio volume control knob on the side of the MTC screen or from the steering wheel radio controls (see “Audio Controls” in this section). The system will automatically mute the radio when using the phone mode. When activating the phone mode using voice commands with speakerphone, you should speak normally in a conversational tone from the driver’s position towards the front dome light where the voice command system microphone is located. System recognition of the user’s voice can decrease when the speaking too quickly or too loudly. Phone Mode By using the Phone button it is possible to: activate the phone mode, start a call, show recent incoming and outgoing calls, show contact list, etc. All these functions can also be reached by using the touch screen commands on the MTC screen. When pressing the button an audible sound will indicate system readiness to accept a command. Dashboard Instruments and Controls Voice Commands By using voice commands, after pressing the button, it is possible to control the AM and FM radio, the satellite radio and all other media or devices connected to and controlled by the “Player” mode (i.e CD player, SD card, USB/iPod player). When pressing the button, an acoustic signal will indicate the system is ready to accept a voice command. NOTE: For further details refer to the Maserati Touch Control guide. 4 181 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 182 5 – Driving Normal Starting of the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Drive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Brake and Stability Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Using the Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use of the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . Tires - General Information . . . . . . . . . . Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 206 208 211 220 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Driving Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 183 Driving Normal Starting of the Engine WARNING! • Hold the brake pedal down when starting the engine. • It is dangerous to run the engine in an enclosed area. The engine consumes oxygen and discharges carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide and other toxic gases in the atmosphere. 5 When doors are opened, the instrument cluster displays the Maserati Logo in the center and the complete odometer plus the “open doors” indicator in the lower part of the cluster. Before starting the engine, close the doors, adjust your seat, the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt and instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. The shift lever must be in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear (see “Automatic Transmission” in this section). CAUTION! • Before starting the engine, switch off the electrical devices with a high power consumption (air-conditioning and heating system, heated rear window, headlights, etc.). • Do not start the engine if the fuel level in the tank is low. The keyless ignition device allows the driver to operate the ignition switch by pushing a button, as long as the key fob RKE transmitter is within the passenger compartment (check “Keys” in section 2 for further information). By pressing the brake pedal and pushing the START/STOP button the engine starts and the shift lever position, engine temperature, fuel 184 gages, Maserati logo and complete odometer, will display. The current display subsequently sets up with the latest screenshot. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to starting it, press the button again. Driving NOTE: NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) position and the transmission is in P (Park), the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position. If the driver only pushes the START/STOP button but does not press the brake pedal, the ignition switch cycles to the ACC position (see “Keys” in section 2) and the instrument cluster displays the screenshot. At the second press of the START/STOP button, the ignition device switches to RUN position (see “Keys” in section 2) and the instrument cluster displays the latest screenshot. At the third press of the START/STOP button the ignition switch returns to OFF position and the display powers down. At the fourth press of the START/STOP button the screen will display the following message: “Press Brake and Push Button to Start”. After starting the engine, the idle speed is controlled automatically and will decrease as the engine warms up. Engine Start Failure CAUTION! • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. • If the vehicle battery is dead, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. See “Auxiliary Jump Start Procedure” in section 6 for further information. 5 Flooded engine clearing If the engine fails to start after you have followed the described procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, move the shift lever in P (Park) position. Press and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator all the way to the floor and hold it, then 185 Driving press and release the START/STOP button once. The starter will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal starting of the engine” procedure. Starting by cold engine Start-off slowly, avoiding sudden acceleration and rev the engine at low medium speeds. High-performance driving should be avoided until the engine temperature reaches 149-158°F (65-70°C ). 5 Engine Turn Off • Place the shift lever in P (Park) (see “Automatic Transmission” in this section). • With the engine at idle, press and release the START/STOP button. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position. A burst on the accelerator pedal before turning off the engine has no purpose and increases fuel consumption. • If the shift lever is not in P (Park), the START/STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition 186 switch will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in P (Park) and the button is pressed twice from the OFF position. • If the shift lever is not in P (Park) and the START/STOP button is pressed once, the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle Not in Park” message and the engine will remain running. WARNING! Never leave a vehicle out of the P (Park) position, as it could roll away. NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) position and the transmission is in P (Park), the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to OFF position. Automatic Transmission The electronic shift lever replaces the conventional mechanical lever and has no mechanical connection to the transmission. The transmission is operated by electrical actuators on the hydraulic system and all commands to the control system are transmitted by the CAN network. The lever itself represents a mere user interface. Gear positions are simulated by solenoids inside the lever body, which are computer controlled and enable or disable certain positions of the lever. The solenoids inside the gear lever prevent the movement of the lever towards invalid positions. The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating, therefore the gearshift behavior could become perfect as expected after few hundreds of miles. CAUTION! In order to properly use the Automatic Transmission, it is essential that you read through the whole chapter, so that you can understand right from (Continued) Driving (Continued) the start what the correct and granted operations are. Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: • Shift into P (Park) only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. This is the default position of the lever and should be used every time the ignition switch is cycled to OFF. • Shift into or out of R (Reverse) only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. • Do not shift between P (Park), R (Reverse), N (Neutral) or D (Drive) when the engine is above idle speed • To effect any change from vehicle stop to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 1st or 2nd gear, it is necessary to keep the brake pedal fully depressed. WARNING! • It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing on the brake pedal. • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the electronic parking brake, shift the transmission into P (Park), and turn the engine off. The shift lever will consequently lock in P (Park) position for a few seconds, then eases, handling the change to prevent the motion of the car. • Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children in an unattended vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a feature which requires the shift lever to be placed in P (Park) before the engine can be turned off. This prevents the driver from inadvertently leaving the vehicle without first placing the transmission in P (Park). This system also locks the shift lever in P (Park) whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position. Automatic Transmission Controls 5 Automatic transmission is operated by a selection lever with lock button and by a series of buttons located on the central console. Using the selection lever it is possible to select following positions, indicated on the top of the lever: the selected position will illuminate in amber light. • P (Park); • R (Reverse); • N (Neutral); • D (Drive) automatic forward speed (8 ranges); 187 Driving By operating instead the lever, the new range will be indicated in the field and in the lower part of the display. • +/- to upshift or downshift when manual mode in D (Drive) status, or set M (Manual) mode. Transmission status is visible on the lever and on the lower part of the Instrument cluster display. Buttons on the central console have following functions: 5 188 to exclude/reactivate the ESC system. • M (Manual): to switch from automatic to manual driving mode. • I C E: to activate/deactivate the driving mode in slippery surfaces conditions. • SPORT: to activate/deactivate a sportier driving mode. • to switch between the two suspensions setting modes. By selecting one of these functions, the LED beside the button illuminates. The Electric Parking Brake lever is part of the shift control panel (see “Parking Brake” in section 5). • By pressing the release button on the lever, the gear position field is displayed: if you release the button without moving the lever, the field disappears after 2 seconds. If the vehicle is temporarily in the manual drive mode, D2 (Drive) status, or in M1 (Manual) drive mode, the gear position is indicated beside the lever status, on the lower part of the display. Driving the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot pressed on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears. DO NOT race the engine when shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) into another gear range. Automatic Transmission Range P (Park) In normal conditions, the shift lever is always unlocked. When in D (Drive) mode it is possible to upshift or downshift the changing gears by automatically temporary setting in M (Manual) mode. You must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of P (Park) position. Shifting from D (Drive) to P (Park) or R (Reverse) should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and Use this position to park the vehicle. Shifting gears from P (Park) position is only possible with the brake pedal pressed. To move the shift lever from P (Park) position to any other position, the engine must be switched on. The engine can be regularly started in P (Park) range. Never attempt to use P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion. When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift lever in the P (Park) position first, and then apply the electronic parking brake by pulling the handle upwards. The Instrument cluster will display the related light indicator and the message for 5 seconds. 5 When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in P (Park). For enhanced security, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill and away from the curb on an uphill grade. 189 Driving R (Reverse) WARNING! • Never use the P (Park) position as a substitute for the electronic parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to prevent vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. • Make sure the transmission is in P (Park) before leaving the vehicle. CAUTION! 5 • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain. • The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the P (Park) position: • when shifting into P (Park), press the lock button on the shift lever and push the lever all the way forward until it stops. When released, the lever will return to its standard position; • with the brake pedal released, verify that P (Park) position is illuminated on the shift lever. 190 This range is used to move the vehicle backward. We recommend to shift into R (Reverse) only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. • Vehicle halted: switching between P (Park), R (Reverse) and D (Drive) requires pressing the unlock button on the lever and brake pedal: N (Neutral) is reached only by pressing the unlock button on the lever. • Vehicle moving: the driver can switch from R (Reverse) to N (Neutral), or vice versa, by pressing the lock button on the shift lever. N (Neutral) • Vehicle halted and engine started: switching from N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), P (Park) and/or D (Drive) requires brake pedal and unlock button pressed. • Vehicle moving: switching from N (Neutral) to R (Reverse) and/or D (Drive) requires pressing the unlock button. Switching to R (Reverse) starting from N (Neutral) is only possible if the vehicle is moving backwards, while switching to D (Drive) starting from N (Neutral) is only possible if the vehicle is moving forwards. Set the parking brake and shift the transmission into P (Park) if you must leave the vehicle. WARNING! Do not switch to N (Neutral) and/or never turn off the ignition to coast downhill. These are unsafe practices that limit driver’s response to changing traffic or road conditions. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. CAUTION! Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in N (Neutral) can result in severe transmission damage. See “Towing a Disabled Vehicle” in section 6 for further information. D (Drive) This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically shifts up and down through all gears. Driving The D (Drive) position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions of the vehicle. • Vehicle stationary: switching from D (Drive) to R (Reverse) and/or to P (Park) requires brake pedal and unlock button pressed: reaching N (Neutral) starting from D (Drive) is allowed by only pressing the unlock button on the shift lever. • To enable special operations while the car is moving at a low speed, such as getting out of a marsh or snow, it is possible to run quickly from D (Drive) to R (Reverse), and vice versa, by pressing the reset button on the gear shift lever. • Vehicle moving: switching to N (Neutral) from D (Drive) requires the unlock button on the shift lever pressed. • From D (Drive) selected mode it is always possible to switch to M (Manual), by pressing the M (Manual) button: the Led indicator beside the button will light up; to return to D (Drive) position, the same action should be performed as the LED will turn off. • When in D (Drive) mode, moving the shift lever forward or backwards to the next step without pressing the unlock button on the lever will cause the system to enter a temporary function and enable the manual shift mode. This range is indicated with the symbols “+/-” on the right and left side of the “D” letter on the gear range field of the display. The system will then switch back to automatic mode according to time elapsed in “temporary” mode and driving conditions. At extremely cold temperatures (-23°F / -30°C or below), transmission may be affected by the low temperature of the engine and transmission. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a normal level. that wheel slip is unlikely to occur. When specific road and environmental conditions require increased levels of road traction, the vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode. Drive mode, RWD, or AWD, is displayed on the TFT display. Refer to paragraph “TFT Display” in chapter “Instrument Cluster” of section 4 for further information. WARNING! There may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel slip condition occurs. 5 All-Wheel Drive (V6 Engine) This vehicle is equipped with an active on-demand All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system provides available optimum traction for a wide variety of road surface and driving conditions. The system minimizes wheel slip by automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear wheels as necessary. To maximize fuel economy, the AWD vehicle automatically defaults to Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) when road and environmental conditions are such V6 Engine 191 Driving Drive Mode NOTE: If the “Service AWD System” warning message appears after engine start up, or during driving, it means that the AWD system is not functioning properly. If the warning message is often activated, it is recommended to go to the service. Keys (buttons) on the side of the shift lever only have two functions: OFF and ON. The OFF state (button released) is the standard function mode. The ON state is activated by pressing the button, the dedicated LED will illuminate. It is necessary to press the button for at least 3 seconds. The table shows the different drive modes according to the state of the keys. Button 5 M V6 Engine ICE SPORT WARNING! When “Service AWD System” is activated driver should be aware of different driving behavior and reduce speed. The “Service AWD System” also warns the driver not to drive into cross country areas requiring AWD and snow roads. 192 OFF – Button released The tables below summarizes the adjustment of transmission and engine parameters according to set drive mode/s. is the only mode that does not depend on the activation or deactivation of the other modes. The tables show the configurations with button NOT pressed and the button pressed. ON – Button pressed (LED ON) Electronic Stability Control ESC activated Electronic Stability Control ESC partially deactivated Autoshift Mode (Auto) Manual shift mode (Manual) Increase Control Efficiency mode OFF Increase Control Efficiency mode ON (*) Normal drive mode (Normal) Sportier drive mode (SPORT) Soft suspensions setting (Soft) Hard suspensions setting (Hard) (*) I C E (Increase Control and Efficiency) operates on engine supply in order to reduce fuel consumption, exhausts, noisiness (efficiency) by dampen vehicle reactions (control). The current mode is also useful for low grip surfaces. Driving Button NOT pressed M M M ICE ICE ICE SPORT SPORT Normal + Manual I C E + Auto + Soft Sport + Auto + + Soft suspensions suspensions Soft suspensions Sport + Auto + Hard suspensions Active Active-Sport Button pressed Setup Normal + Auto + Soft suspensions Stability control Active M Active Active-Sport Suspensions setup Normal Normal Normal Normal Hard Engine control Normal Normal Comfort Performance Performance Engine boost Normal boost Overboost Low boost Overboost Overboost Exhaust sound Low up to 3,000 rpm Low up to 3,000 rpm Low Always High Always High Gear shifting point Normal - Comfort Performance Performance Kick down Yes Yes Yes - Soft Yes - Strong Yes - Strong Rev limiter 7,000 rpm (V8) 6,200 rpm (V6) 7,000 rpm (V8) 6,200 rpm (V6) 6,700 rpm (V8) 6,000 rpm (V6) 7,200 rpm (V8) 6,500 rpm (V6) 7,200 rpm (V8) 6,500 rpm (V6) Automatic downshift Normal Anti - Stall Comfort Performance Performance Transmission speed Normal Rapid - Normal Comfort Sport Sport 5 193 Driving Button pressed ESC OFF ESC OFF ESC OFF ESC OFF ESC OFF M M M M ICE Button pressed Setup Normal + Auto + Soft suspensions 5 194 ICE ICE SPORT SPORT Normal + Manual I C E + Auto + Soft Sport + Auto + + Soft suspensions suspensions Soft suspensions Sport + Auto + Hard suspensions Stability control OFF OFF OFF - According to speed OFF OFF Suspensions setup Normal Normal Normal Normal Hard Engine control Normal Normal Comfort Performance Performance Engine boost Normal boost Overboost Low boost Overboost Overboost Exhaust sound Low up to 3,000 rpm Low up to 3,000 rpm Low Always High Always High Gear shifting point Normal - Comfort Performance Performance Kick down Yes Yes Yes - Soft Yes - Strong Yes - Strong Rev limiter 7,000 rpm (V8) 6,200 rpm (V6) 7,000 rpm (V8) 6,200 rpm (V6) 6,700 rpm (V8) 6,000 rpm (V6) 7,200 rpm (V8) 6,500 rpm (V6) 7,200 rpm (V8) 6,500 rpm (V6) Automatic downshift Normal Anti - Stall Comfort Performance Performance Transmission speed Normal Rapid - Normal Comfort Sport Sport Driving Activation/Deactivation of Drive Mode To insert a driving mode, briefly press the corresponding button. The LED beside the button will light along with the indicator light on the display, combined with a specific message for 5 seconds (see examples) or the specific symbol of the set mode. To activate button press the corresponding button for at least 3 seconds. gear is displayed on the instrument cluster beside “M”. To disable the mode, press the button again: the LED or symbol on the cluster will turn off. 5 M (Manual) Drive Mode In this mode, the transmission interacts with the driver in order to allow manual shift and ensure increased control of the vehicle. The current mode allows the gear system to optimize the engine brake action, remove undesired shifting into a higher and lower gears and improve the overall performance of the vehicle. This mode allows you to move the shift lever step by step forward (-) or backward (+) without pressing the lock button. The current transmission Using the shift paddles behind the steering wheel (if present), the corresponding icon will display beside the “M” indication and current shifted gear. Pull the right shift paddle (+) towards the steering wheel and release it to enter the higher gear; do the same 195 Driving operation with the left shift paddle (-) to enter the lower gear. 5 Manual mode can be activated at any time, with no need to release the brake pedal. Even if the release button is pressed and gear is shifted in R (Reverse), P (Park) or N (Neutral), the selected manual mode will be maintained. In Manual mode, the transmission will shift up or down (+/-) if manually 196 selected by the driver by using the shift lever, or shift paddles on the steering wheel (if present). The transmission remains in the engaged gear until the driver shifts into another higher or lower gear, except in the following cases. • Lack of accelerator pedal activity will cause the transmission to revert to automatic operation. The transmission will also upshift automatically once maximum engine speed is reached. • If in SPORT mode, the transmission will remain in the selected gear even when maximum engine speed is reached. The transmission will upshift only if enabled by the driver. Manual upshift or downshift will be maintained as long as SPORT mode is selected, even by full stroke pedal press. • If in M (Manual) or in SPORT mode, the transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to halt (to prevent engine lugging) and the current gear will display on the instrument cluster. Shifting the gear lever backward (+) or moving the right shift paddle (+) towards the steering wheel when stationary, will cause the vehicle to start in second gear. If the vehicle speed is too low, the system will ignore further upshifts. Avoid using speed control when the M (Manual) mode is engaged. Gear Shift Indicator Light In order to improve fuel economy, we recommend that you shift gears when the system prompts you to do so. This will help reduce fuel consumption without significantly affecting vehicle performance. The indicator beside the displayed gear will light up just before reaching the required speed for gear change. When the new gear is engaged, the indicator turns off. If the shift runs late or is not performed at all, the indicator remains lit for a few seconds then turns off. As soon as new conditions occur requiring further gear change, the indicator light will illuminate again. Driving Transmission Malfunction and Overheating Conditions NOTE: The gearshift indicator will only work when the transmission is set in M (Manual) mode. I C E Mode excluding ESC To release the vehicle in low grip conditions (e.g.: snow, mud, sand, etc), it is possible to shift the transmission feature in the specific driving mode as required for these situations, by pressing the I C E button and to exclude completely the yaw and spinning control system, by pressing the button for two seconds . Transmission Emergency Control Transmission function is monitored electronically to detect abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this situation, the transmission may operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission system may be able to re-engage or start the engine. The Malfunction Indicator Light may illuminate. A message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver about the more serious transmission conditions, and indicate what actions may be necessary. Transmission Oil Over Temperature If the transmission oil temperature exceeds the operating limit, the amber light illuminates on the instrument cluster. In this case, slow down until the temperature returns to normal level (the light will turn off). If this is not sufficient, we recommend you stop the vehicle, shift the lever to position P (Park) or N (Neutral) and keep the engine idle until the temperature warning light turns off and the message disappears from the display. Resume driving without demanding high engine performance. 5 197 Driving If the warning light turns on again, it is advisable to stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and wait for the engine/transmission assembly to fully cool down. • Shift the transmission into D (Drive) and then into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation. NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit an Authorized Maserati Dealer at your earliest possible convenience, which has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. 5 If the instrument cluster message indicates that the transmission may not re-engage after engine shutdown, perform the following procedure preferably at a Maserati Service Center. In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps. • Stop the vehicle. • Shift the transmission into P (Park), if possible. • Turn the engine off. • Wait approximately 30 seconds. • Restart the engine. 198 Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position See chapter “Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position” in section 6. Parking Brake The vehicle is equipped with an electric automatic parking brake, also called EPB (Electric Parking Brake). It is automatically engaged when the engine is turned off and disengaged with engine running and driver’s door closed, while pressing the brake pedal and operating the shift lever. When the parking brake is applied, the warning light lights up on the Rev Counter display and the related message is displayed on the instrument cluster for 5 seconds (see “Instrument Cluster” in section 4). During engagement and disengagement procedures, the warning light flashes until the parking brake has reached its maximum activation force and is respectively fully released. Driving In the above mentioned conditions, the automatic engagement function can be deactivated/activated by using the command “Vehicle settings” on the main menu (refer to paragraph “Deactivating Automatic Operation” in this chapter). simply by pulling the lever upward within 3 minutes after turning off. Manual Engagement/ Disengagement The parking brake can also be manually engaged or disengaged when the engine is running or the ignition switch is in the RUN position, by pressing the brake pedal and raising the lever located behind the shift lever. When the parking brake is applied, the warning light lights up on the Rev Counter and the related message will be displayed for 5 seconds on the instrument cluster. If you attempt to engage/disengage the parking brake without having pressed the brake pedal, a message will be displayed, warning you to proceed. If the engine was turned off when the automatic engagement device was deactivated (see “Deactivating Automatic Operation” in this chapter) it is possible to shift the parking brake CAUTION! The main function of the EPB is to allow safe parking of the vehicle, therefore it must only be applied when the vehicle is already stationary. If the EPB is used while the vehicle is moving and decelerating until a speed lower of 3 mph (5 km/h) and, in particular, until complete stop (typically in a sudden brake), it is necessary to have the EPB system checked by the Authorized Maserati Dealer. WARNING! • Always hold the brake pedal pressed during engagement or disengagement of the parking brake. • The EPB command activation while running, generates a deceleration of the vehicle with strong deceleration (Dynamic Braking). It is therefore recommended to use this feature only in case of emergency. The stability of the car is guaranteed by the action of the activated ESC system. 5 199 Driving Deactivating Automatic Operation The automatic engagement function can be deactivated/reactivated by selecting the command “Vehicle settings” on the main menu, the command is reachable through the switch on the right-side of the steering wheel (refer to “Instrument Cluster” in section 4.) Press and release the switch toward the arrow ► to select “Electric Park Brake”. 5 Scroll with the switch toward the arrow ▲ or ▼ through the programmable options. Press and release the switch toward the arrow ► to set the selected option. A check mark will remain next to the previously selected item until a new selection is made. Press and release the switch once again toward the arrow ► to visualize the options connected to this function. • Auto Apply On; • Auto Apply Off (default setting). 200 “Setting Saved” Selection notification appears as a popup for 2 seconds then the display will show again the modified function. In order to resume the automatic operation follow the same procedures and selecting “Auto Apply Off” option. CAUTION! • Under certain conditions when the battery voltage is low, the electric automatic parking brake system may temporarily be deactivated for safety reasons. Therefore, typically upon starting the engine, when the battery voltage drops, a message may temporarily be displayed, indicating that automatic operation is temporarily disabled. • In case of ripetitive requests to reset the EPB through the messages shown on the TFT display, please contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer. Driving Failure Indication Parking In the event of electric parking brake system failure, the warning light on the display will light up and the related message will show for 5 seconds. Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the P (Park) position. WARNING! In the event of an EPB failure, take your vehicle to the nearest Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as possible. WARNING! • Always check that the vehicle is locked before leaving it. • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. • Do not park the vehicle on paper, grass, dry leaves or other flammable materials. They could catch fire if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. When parking on hill roads, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in P (Park), otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of P (Park). In certain conditions, it is however advisable to disengage the parking brake manually and slightly apply the service brake for starting off. This is advisable when there are obstacles very close to the vehicle in the direction in which you intend to move. 5 • Do not leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended. Emergency Disengagement In case of brake lock with complete electrical system failure, it is necessary to release the brake manually (see the complete procedure in “Emergency Release of the Parking Brake” chapter in section 6). CAUTION! When you need to park the vehicle on a steep slope, both with the engine on and off, it is recommended not only to engage the parking brake, but also to shift the shift lever to P (Park) before leaving the vehicle. 201 Driving “Drive Away Inhibit” strategy In order to avoid a dangerous condition due to leave the vehicle not “braked” with running engine and without driver on board, “Drive Away Inhibit” strategy alerts the driver with messages on the instrument cluster display and sounding chimes, then put the transmission in P (Park). The table shows the vehicle condition and the action that the system runs to exit the dangerous condition. 5 202 Vehicle condition Action of the driver • Engine running and speed lower than 3 km/h (1.8 mph). • Transmission in any position other P (Park). • Driver safety belt unlocked. • Driver door opened. • Brake pedal pressed. The driver releases the brake pedal to get out of the vehicle. Warnings Warnings • Slow continuous chime. • “Vehicle not in Park” message on the display. • Fast chime. • “Secure vehicle to prevent movement" message on the display. The system put the transmission in P (Park) position Driving Brake and Stability Control System The vehicle is equipped with an Electronic Stability Control System (ESC), which helps to maintain directional control in the event of loss of traction of the tires. The system is able to detect potentially dangerous situations for the stability of the vehicle and automatically sets the brakes on all four wheels in a differentiated manner, in order to provide a torque stabilizing of the vehicle. ESC includes following subsystems: • EBD (electronic brake force distribution); • ABS (anti blocking system); • TCS (traction control system); • BAS (brake assist system); • HSA (hill start assist). WARNING! • These systems cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from affecting the vehicle, nor can it increase traction, braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires. • These systems cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. tires and the road. Therefore, always keep a safe distance from the vehicle in front of yours and reduce your speed when entering a curve. • The capabilities of a vehicle equipped with these systems must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the driver’s and the passenger’s safety or the safety of others. NOTE: Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking to prevent wheel lock-up. The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle. WARNING! The ABS helps prevent the wheels from locking, but it does not increase the physical grip limits between the • When the vehicle's speed is higher than 7 mph (11 km/h), you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as other motor noises. The system is performing a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly. • This self-check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h). ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris. You may also experience the following when the brake system goes into AntiLock: 5 • The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a short time after the vehicle stops). • The clicking sound of solenoid valves. • Brake pedal pulsations. 203 Driving • A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop. These are all normal characteristics of ABS functioning. 5 WARNING! • The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified Maserati personnel. • Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping brakes makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. Do not pump brakes. Traction Control System (TCS) The current device is an integral part of the ESC system. It operates automatically by reducing the power transmitted by the engine in case of slipping, loss of grip on wet floor 204 (aquaplaning), acceleration on slippery snow-covered or frozen surfaces, etc. Activating under slip conditions different control systems: • if slippage affects both drive wheels, it reduces the power transmitted by the engine; • if slippage only affects one drive wheel, it brakes the slipping wheel automatically. Brake Assist System (BAS) This system completes the ABS system by optimizing the vehicle braking capacity during emergency brake maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes in order to help reduce braking distances. The quick brake coupling is optimal for BAS performances. In order to fully exploit the system, apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the entire vehicle stop sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure earlier than required. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC corrects over steering and under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake to the appropriate wheel. Engine power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the conditions of instability and maintain the right direction. The system is also able to reduce the engine power. Through sensors fitted on the vehicle, the ESC system detects the driver’s chosen direction comparing it to the one maintained while running. In case of discrepancy between the required trajectory and the current one, the ESC system brakes the appropriate wheel to counteract over or under steering. Driving • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position. • Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position. The ESC system has two available operating modes: ESC on This is the normal ESC operating mode. At each start-up of the vehicle, the ESC system is set in this mode and should be used for most driving conditions. The ESC should only be turned off for specific reasons as pointed out in the following paragraphs. ESC off The “ESC off” mode is aimed for a more spirited driving experience but also purposeful for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. The current mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the threshold for ESC activation, allowing higher wheel spin than normally granted by the ESC system. The switch is fitted beside the gear shift lever: to deactivate the system see“Drive mode” in “Automatic Transmission” in this section. NOTE: • When in “ESC off” mode, the TCS functionality of ESC is deactivated (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS paragraph of this chapter). All other stability features of ESC function regularly. • To improve the vehicle's traction when driving with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “ESC off” mode by pressing the switch and remain in this operational mode no longer than needed. Once the situation requiring “ESC off” mode is overcome, turn the ESC on again by pressing the switch. This may also be performed while in motion. brake pressure proportionally to the amount of throttle/torque applied as the vehicle starts to move in the chosen direction. HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate: • vehicle is stationary. • gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in reverse gear). HSA will work in R (Reverse) and all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met. The system will not activate if the gear is placed in N (Neutral) or P (Park). 5 Hill Start Assist (HSA) The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle uphill. HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure applied for a short period of time also after releasing the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will start sloping down. The system will release 205 Driving Using the Brakes CAUTION! To obtain a good performance of brake pads and discs, avoid sudden braking during the first 190 mi (300 km). The pad wear limit is indicated by the illumination of the warning light , on the instrument panel. In this event, please contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer. 5 excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. In an emergency, full braking capacity may be impaired. Brake pads and brake discs Wear on the brake pads and brake discs depends to a great extent on the driving style and the conditions of use and therefore cannot be expressed in actual miles driven on the road. The high-performance brake system is designed for optimal braking effect at all speeds and temperatures. Certain speeds, braking forces and ambient conditions (e.g. temperature and humidity) can therefore cause the brakes to “squeal”. New brake pads and/or brake discs WARNING! Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, 206 New brake pads have to be “broken in”, and therefore only attain optimal friction to the brake disc when the vehicle has covered several hundred miles. During this first period, the slightly reduced braking ability must be compensated for by pressing the brake pedal harder. This applies whenever the brake pads and/or brake discs are replaced. Use of the Engine Breaking-In Today's modern production methods are designed to provide extremely precise construction and assembly of components. However, moving parts do undergo a settling process, basically in the first hours of vehicle operation. Avoid exceeding 5,000 rpm for the first 620 mi trip (1,000 km). After starting the vehicle, do not exceed 4,000 rpm until the engine has warmed up sufficiently (coolant temperature: 149-158°F / 65-70°C). Do not drive keeping at a constant high speed rate for a prolonged time. While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in of the engine. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided. The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, see “Maintenance Procedures” in section 7. Driving A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles of operation. This should be considered as a normal part of the break-in period and not interpreted as an indication of an engine malfunction. While Driving Never travel with the Rev Counter indicator approaching the peak rpm, not even downhill. When the Rev Counter indicator is approaching the peak rpm (red colored zone), take precautions to avoid exceeding that limit. CAUTION! • Under normal conditions, all red warning lights on the instrument cluster display should be off. When they come on, this indicates a malfunction. Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in section 4. • Continuing to drive when a red warning light is on could cause serious damage to the vehicle and affect its performance. WARNING! Do not travel downhill with the engine off, as the power booster will no longer function due to the vacuum decrease. This can be realized, and if done the system can become ineffective. The power steering will also lose its efficiency under these conditions. Ensure proper operation of different devices checking their respective control warning lights. transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current local regulations of various countries. If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the malfunction indicator light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your Maserati Service Center to service your vehicle. Although the vehicle will still be drivable and not need towing, contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer for service as soon as possible. 5 On Board Diagnostic System Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic 207 Driving Electronic Cruise Control CAUTION! 5 208 • Prolonged driving with the malfunction indicator light (MIL) on could cause further damage to the emissions control system. It could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed. • If the malfunction indicator light (MIL) is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required at the Authorized Maserati Dealer. • After the problem has been solved, the Authorized Maserati Dealer personnel will perform specific tests on the test bench for a complete check of the system and, if necessary, also road tests, even on long distances. The electronic speed regulator (Cruise Control) enables the driver to maintain the desired vehicle speed without pressing the accelerator pedal, reducing driving fatigue on highways, especially long trips, as the set speed is automatically maintained. CAUTION! The device can only be switched on at speeds exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h) and it switches off automatically when the brake pedal is pressed. WARNING! The Cruise Control function must only be activated when traffic and the route allow maintaining a constant speed safely for a sufficiently long distance. Controls The electronic Cruise Control buttons are located on the left side of the steering wheel. Control buttons have following functions: ON/OFF button: activation/deactivation; multifunction control: • RES (+), pushed up: resume set speed (higher speed); • CANCEL, pushed: cancel set speed; • SET (–), pushed down: setting speed (lower speed). Driving NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the electronic Cruise Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple Cruise Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the electronic Cruise Control system can be reactivated by pushing the electronic Cruise Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed. Activation Push the ON/OFF button. The amber light in sector 13 of the instrument cluster will illuminate and the related message pops up for 5 seconds. the display returns to the previous setting. Temporary Deactivation A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL switch, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will temporarily deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory, which will appear above the white light (in the example: 45 mph). The system must be turned off when not in use. Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory. WARNING! Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it. 5 The related message will pop up for 5 seconds on the instrument cluster and the display will return to the previous setting, however, the white light will turn on as the Cruise Control is still activated. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The amber light will turn off and a new message pops up for 5 seconds, then 209 Driving 5 Setting Desired Speed Resume Speed Turn the electronic Cruise Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed (in the example: 51 mph), push the switch downward and release. The green light will illuminate and the related message will pop up for 5 seconds on the instrument cluster. To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) switch upward and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 19 mph (30 km/h). If the driver presses the accelerator pedal while the Cruise Control is active, such as to overtake another vehicle, and exceeds the speed limit, the system will temporarily deactivate the speed regulator. A message pops up for 5 seconds on the instrument cluster to alert the driver. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing the switch downward. When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. 210 Changing Speed Setting When the electronic Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the switch upward. Keeping the switch pressed, the set speed will continue to increase until the switch is released, then the new set speed will be maintained and memorized. To decrease speed while the electronic Cruise Control is activated, push the switch downward. Keeping the switch pushed in the downward position, the set speed will continue to decrease until the switch is released. Release the switch when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed will be maintained. Pushing the switch upward or downward once will enable to increase or decrease the set speed of 1.24 mph (2.0 km/h). Each subsequent tap of the switch will increase or decrease the speed of 1.24 mph (2.0 km/h). Driving Using Electronic Cruise Control on Hillsides The transmission may be downshifted on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed. The electronic Cruise Control system maintains set speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. On steep slopes, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so we recommend to drive without Electronic Cruise Control. WARNING! Electronic Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use electronic Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery roads. Tires - General Information Tire Safety Information Tire Markings Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE: P245/40 ZR20 (99Y) XL or 245/40 ZR20 (Y99) XL Size Designation: P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards “...blank...” = Passenger car tire based on European design standards 245 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 40 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) — Ratio of section height to section width of tire 1. U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) ZR = Construction Code • Z: means a tire usable at speeds greater than 150 mph (240 km/h) • R: means radial construction 5 20 = Rim diameter in inches (in) 2. Size Designation 3. Service Description 4. Maximum Pressure and Maximum Load 5. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades (see “Department of Transportation Uniform Tire Quality Grades” in this section). 211 Driving Service Description: 99 = Load Index — A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry Y = Speed Symbol — A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions. The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits). 5 Load Identification: “...blank...” = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire XL = Extra Load (or reinforced) tire LL = Light Load tire Tire Identification Number (TIN) The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, however the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. 212 Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. Tire and Loading Information Label The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side rear door pillar. EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0313 DOT = Department of Transportation — This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use. MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits). L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits). ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits). 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits). In this case, 03 means the 3rd week. 13 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits). In this case, 13 means the year 2013. This label tells you important information about the: • Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle. • Total weight the vehicle can carry. • Tire size designed for the vehicle. • Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires. Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Driving “Tire and Loading Information Label” and in the “Features and Specifications” section. NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs/XXX kg” on the tire and loading information label. The combined weight of occupants and cargo/luggage should never exceed the weight referenced here. Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit • Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs/XXX kg” on the vehicle's label. • Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in the vehicle. • Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs/XXX kg. • The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs/635 kg and there will be five 150 lbs/68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs/295 kg (since 5 x 150/68 = 750/340, and 1,400/635– 750/340 = 650 lbs/295 kg). • Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in previous Step. • If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. NOTE: • The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle. • For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs/392 kg. 5 213 Driving Occupants TOTAL FRONT REAR Combined weight of Occupants and Cargo from Tire Label MINUS = AVAILABLE Cargo/ Luggage and Trailer Tongue weight minus 1: 200 lbs/91 kg 2: 130 lbs/59 kg 3: 160 lbs/72 kg 4: 100 lbs/45 kg 5: 80 lbs/37 kg TOTAL WEIGHT: 670 lbs (304 kg) = 195 lbs/88 kg minus 1: 210 lbs/95 kg 2: 180 lbs/82 kg 3: 150 lbs/68 kg TOTAL WEIGHT: 540 lbs/245 kg = 325 lbs/147 kg minus 1: 200 lbs/91 kg 2: 200 lbs/91 kg TOTAL WEIGHT: 400 lbs/182 kg = 465 lbs/211 kg EXAMPLE 1 865 lbs/392 kg 5 2 3 EXAMPLE 2 865 lbs/392 kg 5 3 2 1 EXAMPLE 3 865 lbs/392 kg 2 214 2 0 Combined Occupant's weight (1, 2, 3, etc.) Driving Tires Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires, and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low profile tires. WARNING! Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase the stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. Department of Transportation Uniform Tire Quality Grades The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle. All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction Grades The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AAA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. WARNING! The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. 5 Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditons on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. 215 Driving 5 The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law. Radial tires fitted on the vehicle may look properly inflated even when they actually are under inflated. Do not make a visual judgment when determining proper inflation. Three primary driving aspects are affected by improper tire pressure: WARNING! The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. WARNING! • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential for safety and best performance of your vehicle. The tire pressure monitoring system “TPMS” setup on the vehicle (see “Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in this section) may alert the driver about insufficient tire pressure even though the driver is responsible for checking regularly the tire pressure. 216 Safety • Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire overheating and failure. • Over-inflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that results in tire failure. • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Economy Improper inflation pressures may cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. Ride comfort and vehicle stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. Tire Pressure Checkup The proper cold tire inflation pressure is indicated on the driver's side rear door pillar. Inflation pressure specified on the label always refers to “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mi (1.6 km) after a three hour period. Driving Check tire pressures more often in case of significant outside temperature changes, as tire pressure varies according to temperature changes. The pressure should be checked and if necessary adjusted; tire wear and overall conditions should also be checked monthly. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 PSI (0.07 bar) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in winter. Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 PSI (0.21 bar) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition. Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 PSI (0.13 to 0.4 bar) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low. After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem and the TPMS sensor connected to it. Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced. These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 0.06 in (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to one of the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. WARNING! The wet performance (aquaplaning resistance) will decrease proportionally to the thickness of the tread. Tires Durability The service life of a tire depends on various factors including, but not limited to: • driving style; • tire pressure; • distance driven. WARNING! Tires and the spare tire (if equipped) should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Replacement Tires In order to maintain high performance and safety level under all driving conditions, Maserati strongly recommends to use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. See the “Tire and Loading Information” label on the driver’s side rear door pillar for the size designation of your tire or see “Technical Data” in section 8. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. 5 217 Driving NOTE: Maserati recommendes Maserati Genuine Tires marked with “MGT” logo specifically designed for its models. 5 It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel assembly, make sure that the wheel’s specifications (valve, TPMS sensor and tire) match those of the original wheels. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. The Authorized Maserati Dealer is available to provide suggestions as to the types of tires most suited to the use foreseen by the Customer. WARNING! • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in altered steering, handling, and braking operations of 218 the vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings appointed for your vehicle. • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision. • Always check the maximum speed rating on the tire sidewall on any tire on the vehicle. • Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tires. Risk of accident and serious pesonal injury due to excessive speed. • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. CAUTION! Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings. Winter Tires These tires are specially designed for driving on snow and ice and are fitted to replace the ones supplied with the vehicle. Winter or All season tires can be identified by the M+S (Mud & Snow) or 3PMSF (3 Peaks Mountain Snow Flake) designation on the tire sidewall. Before mounting snow tires, contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer to receive the technical information necessary to advise you on wheel and tire compatibility. Use snow tires only in sets of four. As to the type of tires to use, inflation pressures and winter tires specifications, carefully follow the indications as reported in the “Technical Data” and “Tire Inflation Pressure” chapters in section 8. The features of these tires are markedly reduced in winter when tread depth is less than 0.16 in (4 mm). In this case, they should be replaced. Driving The specific features of winter tires lead to lower performance under normal weather conditions or on long highway trips, compared to the standard tires. Therefore, their use should be limited to the performance for which they have been type-approved. NOTE: For the correct use and replacement of winter tires, refer to the instructions for normal tires. WARNING! The standard tires profile and rubber mixture are optimized for wet and dry driving conditions. Standard tires may not prove favorable for snow conditions: install snow tires before driving in such conditions to avoid risk of loss of control and damage to the vehicle as well as serious personal injury. NOTE: Snow tires should have the same load capacity as original equipment tires and should be mounted on all four wheels. Snow Chains The use of snow chains is specified by local regulations of each country. Use snow chains of reduced dimensions, with a maximum projection of 0.23 in (6 mm) beyond the tire tread. The chains may be fitted only on 19” driving wheel tires. Check the chain tension after driving for a distance of about 55 yd (50 m) with the chains fitted. With the chains fitted, it is advisable to deactivate the ESC system (see chapter “Automatic Transmission” in this section). CAUTION! • Broken chains can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use. • Do not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. • Avoid holes in the road, do not drive over steps or sidewalks and do not drive on long stretches without snow. This will prevent damage to the vehicle and the roadbed. NOTE: Maserati provides on request spider version snow chains especially developed for this vehicle. This chains are easy to be fitted and can be removed quickly without damaging the wheel rims. The Authorized Maserati Dealer can provide you with all information about the “Maserati Spider Version Snow Chains”, available in the Genuine Accessories range. 5 Compact Spare Tire The limited-use spare tire, or compact-spare tire, is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label indicating the driving speed limitations to comply with when using the spare tire. Keep it inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Information label located on the driver’s side rear door pillar or in the table “Tire Inflation Pressure” in section 8. 219 Driving Mounting the spare tire affects vehicle handling. Replace (or repair) as soon as possible the original equipment tire and reinstall it on the vehicle. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at a time. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure according to the vehicle recommended cold pressure indicated on the label on the driver's side rear door pillar. WARNING! With these compact spare tires, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. 5 The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 PSI (0.07 bar) for every 12°F (7°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mi (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the 220 maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Check “Tires – General Information” in section 5 for information on how to properly inflate the tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there is no adjustment required when this occurs. The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss of the tire. The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition persists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is equal or above the recommended cold inflation pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold inflation pressure in order for the TPMS light to turn off. The system will automatically update and the TPMS light will turn off once the system acquires the correct tire pressure. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to Driving acquire and process the updated setting. For example: Your vehicle (stationary for more than three hours) may have a recommended cold inflation pressure of 30 PSI (2.1 bar). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 PSI (1.8 bar), a temperature drop to 12°F (7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 PSI (1.6 bar). This tire pressure is sufficiently low to turn ON the TPMS Light . Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 PSI (1.8 bar), but the TPMS light will stay lit. In this situation, the TPMS light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold inflation pressure value. WARNING! The TPMS warns the driver that the tire pressure has decreased. This warning does not exempt the driver from periodically checking the tires and from complying with the prescribed tire pressure levels. CAUTION! • The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may occur when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. • The system can temporarily experience radio-electric interference emitted by devices using similar frequencies. • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem and damage the TPMS internal sensor. 5 NOTE: • Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and may lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gage, even if under-inflation has not reached the (Continued) 221 Driving 5 (Continued) level to trigger illumination of the TPMS light . • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire. will automatically update, the graphic display in the instrument panel will stop flashing, and the TPMS light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to acquire and process the updated information. Premium System “Service Tire Pressure System” Warning The TPMS system uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module. The TPMS consists of the following components: The instrument cluster will also display a screenshot reporting the pressure values of each tire with flashing low pressure value. • receiver module; • four TPMS sensors; • various TPMS messages, which display on the instrument cluster; • warning light . Tire Pressure Low Warning will illuminate in The TPMS light the instrument cluster and an acoustic signal will notify that tire pressure is low in one or more of the four tires. 222 Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tire/s with the low pressure (the one/s flashing in the instrument panel graphic) to the recommended cold pressure inflation value indicated on the label. Once the system receives the updated tire pressure value, the system If a system fault is detected, the TPMS light will flash for 75 seconds and then remain lit followed by a beeping sound. Therewith, the instrument cluster will display a "Service Tire Pressure System" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is ineffective. If the ignition switch is cycled, the sequence will repeat, in case the system fault still persists. If the system fault no longer exists, the TPMS light will no longer flash, and the "Service Tire Pressure System" message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. Driving sound. In addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will still display a flashing pressure value corresponding to the compact tire position. A system fault can occur due to any of the following: • Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors. • Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals. • Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. • Using tire chains on the vehicle. • Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors. The instrument cluster will also display a "Service Tire Pressure System" message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected. In this case, the "Service Tire Pressure System" message is then followed with a graphic display with pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPMS sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as the "Service Tire Pressure System" message is displayed. Vehicles with Compact Spare Tire • The compact spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure of the compact spare tire. • If you replace a pneumatic having pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, with the compact spare tire, on the next ignition switch cycle, the TPMS light will illuminate followed by a beeping • After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS light will flash for 75 seconds and then remain lit. The instrument cluster will then display a "Service Tire Pressure System" message for a minimum of five seconds and then displays dashes (--) in place of the pressure value. • Each subsequent ignition switch cycle, will be followed by a beeping sound, the TPMS light will flash for 75 seconds and then remain lit. The instrument cluster will then display a "Service Tire Pressure System" message for a minimum of five seconds and subsequently 5 223 Driving displays dashes (--) in place of the pressure value. 5 • Once you repair, replace or reinstall a tire with the compact spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically. The TPMS light will turn OFF and the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (--), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to acquire and process the updated information. assemblies. After replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on and the instrument cluster will display the “Service Tire Pressure System” message and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values. Beginning with the next ignition switch cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or display the “Service Tire Pressure System” message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure values. TPMS Deactivation The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four tire rims with wheel and tire assemblies free of TPMS sensors, such as winter wheel and tire 224 To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS light will flash for 75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument cluster will then display the “Service Tire Pressure System” message. The instrument cluster will also display pressure values in place of the dashes (--). On the next ignition switch cycle the “Service Tire Pressure System” message will no longer be displayed as long as no system fault exists. Driving General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference. • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The TPMS sensors are regulated under one of the following licenses: United States MRXC4W4MA4 Canada 2546–C4W4MA4 Fuel Requirements The engines are designed to meet all environmental regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using unleaded premium gasoline with an AKI octane rating of 91 or above. AKI (Anti Knock Index) is an average on the Research Octane Number, RON, and the Motor Octane Number, MON (RON + MON/2 gives you the AKI). Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage, and immediate service is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitation. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle at an Authorized Maserati Dealer. Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, and durability for your vehicle. Maserati recommends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC specifications if they are available. Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating, gasoline that contain detergents, anti-corrosion and stability additives are recommended. Using gasoline that have these additives may help improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. CAUTION! The anti-pollution devices of the vehicle require unleaded fuel to be used at all times. Under no circumstance, not even in an emergency, should leaded fuel be supplied to the fuel tank, not even a minimum quantity. This would irreparably damage the catalytic converters. An inefficient catalytic converter results in noxious exhaust emissions which damage the environment. 5 Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline, referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline 225 Driving contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. Maserati supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components. Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle. 5 CAUTION! DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate (see “Instrument Cluster” in section 4). Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol. Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol are not the responsibility of Maserati and may not be covered under warranty. MMT in Gasoline MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl) is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Maserati recommends gasoline without MMT to be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask the gasoline station operator whether or not the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline. Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel. Fuel System Warnings WARNING! Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle's performance: • The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system. • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer for assistance. (Continued) 226 Driving (Continued) • The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of Maserati. NOTE: International tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING! Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open. Refueling To access the fuel filler neck, the filler door must be unlocked. From outside the vehicle, this can only be done by pressing the unlock or the lock button on the key fob RKE transmitter, in the same way as if opening or closing the doors. If any of the door lock controls is pressed from inside the vehicle, the filler door will still remain open to allow refueling. Once the fuel filler door is unlocked, proceed as follows: • Press the indicated area on the filler door, which is located on the rear left side of the vehicle: the filler door will open completely. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the filler seals the system. • Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler – the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling. 5 • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with 227 Driving NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches allowing the flapper door on the fuel filler to open. • To avoid the risk of inhaling noxious fumes, do not breathe close to the fuel filler door, when opened. • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel filler door is open or the tank is being filled. • Never add fuel when the engine is running. This violates most anti-fire regulations and may cause the malfunction indicator light to turn on (see “Instrument Cluster” in section 4). 5 WARNING! • To avoid the risk of fire, do not approach the filler with open flames or cigarettes! 228 Fill the vehicle with fuel. Fuel tank capacity is indicated in the “Refillings” table in section 8. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is basically full: it is possible to further refuel by enabling the fuel nozzle additional fuel supply until twofold clicks. After the two additional clicks, the amount of fuel allowed by the system is very low, we recommend therefore not to persist further. Wait approximately 10 seconds before removing the fuel nozzle in order to ensure completed supply of residual fuel and restrict the risk of fouling the fuel filler door area. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel filler door. CAUTION! To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. Emergency refueling funnel A funnel is provided (in the trunk in the tool box container) for emergency refueling with a gas can. Driving WARNING! A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground and outside the vehicle while filling. • Pull the release cable moderately to avoid its possible break. It's not possible to feel or hear the unlocking of the fuel filler door actuator. • Open the trunk (see “To enter the Trunk” in section 2). • Lift the access cover on the left side of the trunk compartment. Before the Trip Check the following at regular intervals and always before long trips: • tire pressure and condition; • levels of fluids and lubricants; • conditions of the windshield wiper blades; • clean the glass on the external light and all other glass surfaces; • proper operation of the warning lights and of the external lights. Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release If you are unable to unlock the fuel filler door using the key fob RKE transmitter, then use the fuel filler door emergency release fitted in the trunk. Driving Conditions • Then open normally the fuel filler door. CAUTION! It is however advisable to perform these checks at least every 600 mi (1,000 km) and always following the maintenance schedule reported in section 7. 5 Before you drive: • adjust seat position, steering wheel, adjustable pedals (if equipped with) and rear-view mirrors in order to have the best driving position; • ensure that nothing (mat covers, etc.) is obstructing the pedals movement; 229 Driving • carefully arrange and secure any objects in the trunk, to prevent them to move forward in case of sudden stops; • avoid drinking alcohol. 5 230 WARNING! Beyond being prohibited by law, it is extremely dangerous to ride inside the trunk or on the front lid. In the event of an accident, passengers sitting there are more exposed to the risk of serious injury. Passengers must only travel seated in the vehicle seats, with the seat belts fastened. Always check that the driver and all passengers have the seat belts correctly fastened. Safe Driving Although the vehicle is equipped with active and passive safety devices, the driver's conduct is always a decisive factor for road safety. Some simple rules for traveling safely in different conditions are listed below. Some of them will probably already sound familiar but, in any case, it would be useful to read them carefully. the eyes. If they are too high, they may bother other drivers. • Use the high beams only outside of densely-populated areas and when you are sure that they will not disturb other drivers. • When another vehicle is approaching, switch from high beams (if on) to low beams. • Keep lights and headlights clean. • Beware of animals crossing the road. Driving at Night Driving in the Rain The main guidelines to follow when driving at night are set out below. Rain and wet roads are dangerous. On a wet road all maneuvers are more difficult since wheel grip on the asphalt is significantly reduced. This means that braking distances increase considerably and road grip decreases. Some advice for driving in the rain are listed below. • Drive carefully. Night conditions demands more focus and attention. • Reduce your speed, especially on roads with no streetlights. • Stop at early signs of drowsiness. Continuing to drive would be a risk for yourself and for others. Have a rest before continuing your trip. • Keep the vehicle at a greater distance from vehicles in front of you than you would during the day: it is difficult to assess the speed of other vehicles when you only see the lights. • Check that the headlights are correctly adjusted: if they are too low, they reduce visibility and strain • Reduce your speed and keep a greater safety distance from the vehicles in front of you. High speed may result in a loss of vehicle control. • When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is known as aquaplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this Driving possibility: slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. • Heavy rain substantially reduces visibility. In these circumstances, even during the day, turn on the low beams, to be more visible to other drivers. • Set the air conditioning and heating system controls on the demisting function, in order to avoid any visibility problem. • Periodically check the conditions of the windshield wiper blades. • In low grip conditions use I C E driving mode (see chapter “Automatic Transmission” in this section). difficult and braking distances are extended. • Keep a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. • Avoid sudden changes in speed as much as possible. • Whenever possible, avoid overtaking. • If you are forced to stop the vehicle (breakdowns, impossibility of proceeding due to poor visibility, etc.), first of all, try to stop off of the travel lane. Then turn on the hazard warning flashers and, if possible, the low beams. • Sound the horn rhythmically if you hear another vehicle approaching. Driving in Fog If the fog is dense, avoid traveling if possible. When driving in mist, blanket fog or when there is the possibility of banks of fog, please consider some advices listed below. CAUTION! Be aware that rear fog lights can bother the drivers following your vehicle: when visibility is back to normal, turn off these lights. • Keep a moderate speed. • Even in daytime, turn on the low beams, the rear fog lights. Do not use the high beams. • Remember that fog creates dampness on the asphalt and thus any type of maneuver is more Driving in the Mountains Mountain roads usually have many narrow turns and curves, tunnels and steep uphill or downhill slopes: please consider some advices listed below. • Drive at a moderate speed, avoid “cutting” corners. • When driving inside a tunnel in daylight turn on the low beams in advance; avoid high beams and be aware of the rapid brightness change. Avoid abrupt maneuvers that could be dangerous for the following vehicle. • Never coast downhill with the engine off or in neutral. • Remember that passing other vehicles when driving uphill is slower and thus requires more free distance on the road. If you are being overtaken on a hill, slow down and allow the other vehicle to pass. Driving on Snow or Ice Please consider some general advice for driving in these conditions, listed below. 5 • Maintain a very moderate speed. • Fit snow chains or snow tires if the road is covered with snow: see the paragraphs “Tires – General Information” in this section. • We recommend you to activate the I C E mode (see chapter “Automatic Transmission” in this section). • During the winter season, even apparently dry roads can have icy sections. Be careful when crossing bridges, viaducts and roads that 231 Driving have little exposure to the sun and are bordered by trees and rocks. They may be icy. • Keep an ample safe distance from the vehicles in front of you. • Avoid sharp braking, sharp changes in direction and rapid acceleration. Rapid acceleration on snow covered or icy surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear (driving) wheels. 5 WARNING! Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear driving wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.). Driving through Flooded Sections Driving through more than a centimeter of deep shallow standing water section will require extra caution to ensure passenger safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. WARNING! Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so. CAUTION! • Always check the depth of the standing water before driving 232 through it. Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. • Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water. • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. This will minimize wave effects. • Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle drivetrain components. After driving through standing water, do not drive if you are not sure about drivetrain condition. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Warranty. • Getting water inside your vehicle engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Warranty. • After driving through standing water always have the fluids (engine oil, transmission oil, etc) checked for contaminations at an Authorized Maserati Dealer. Driving WARNING! • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to progressively dry the brakes discs and pads. 5 • Getting water inside your vehicle engine can cause it to lock up and stall out. • Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. 233 Driving 234 6 – In an Emergency Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 In the Event of an Accident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 In case of a Punctured Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Emergency Release of the Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . 243 Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position Freeing the Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary Jump-Start Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . Towing a Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 245 246 249 235 In an Emergency Tool Kit Hazard Warning Flashers The tool kit and other first aid equipment are relocated in the trunk and are available by lifting the ground coverage. The hazard warning flasher switch is located in the center of the dashboard under the MTC display. Press the switch to turn on the hazard warning flashers to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. When these lights illuminate, the turn signals, the related warning lights on the instrument cluster and the button start flashing. Press the switch a second time to turn off the hazard warning flashers. This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the hazard warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. Beside the tool kit the vehicle is also equipped with the following tools: The tool kit includes following tools: 6 • 8/10 mm open end wrenches; • 13/17 mm open end wrenches; • double slot + cross-head screwdriver; • tow hook; • pincer for wheel stud caps extraction (where provided); • tool for electric parking brake actuator release. • compact spare wheel. The compact spare wheel is fully provided with electric compressor box, jack and tools for fitting the compact spare wheel, located inside the compact spare wheel itself; • funnel for emergency supply. CAUTION! • When the hazard warning flashers are activated, the turn signals control is disabled. 236 In an Emergency (Continued) • With extended use the hazard warning flashers may wear down your battery. In the Event of an Accident It is important always to keep calm. • If not directly involved, stop at a safe distance of at least ten meters away from the accident area. • If on a highway, stop without obstructing the emergency lane and be especially careful if you need to exit the vehicle. • Turn off the engine and switch on the hazard lights. • At night, illuminate the accident area with the headlights. • Always act with caution to avoid the risk of being crashed into by other drivers. • Indicate that an accident has occurred by placing the emergency triangle (if foreseen) in a well visible position and at the prescribed distance. • Call the emergency services, providing as much information as possible. On the highway, use the special call boxes. • Remove the ignition key (if present) from the vehicles involved. • If fuel or other chemical products can be smelled, do not smoke and ask people around you to put their cigarettes out. • To extinguish fires, even small ones, use a fire extinguisher, blankets, sand or earth. Never use water. • In multiple accidents occurred on highways, particularly where visibility is poor, there is a high risk of being involved in other collisions. Leave the vehicle immediately and move away from the area. In case of Injured Persons • Never leave the injured person alone. • Do not crowd around injured persons. • Reassure the injured person that help is on the way and stay close to them to assist them to avoid possible panic attacks. • Release or cut the seat belts restraining the injured persons. • Do not give the injured persons anything to drink. • Never move an injured person. • Remove the injured person from the vehicle only in an emergency situation, e.g. if there is a risk of fire, sinking in water or falling down into a pit. 6 237 In an Emergency • When removing an injured person, do not pull his/her limbs, never bend his/her head and, as far as possible, keep his/her body in a horizontal position. Emergency Kit (for versions/markets where provided) The Emergency Kit provides first aid in case of a car breakdown or any other situation. The kit comes in a case on the left side of the trunk. The kit includes the following elements: 6 • emergency triangle; • reflective emergency vest; • luminescent pipes providing chemical lights; • dynamo torch; • First Aid Kit; • gloves; • ice scraper; • box with spare lamps and fuses. NOTE: • The items inside the kit could change according to different countries' regulations. • Upon request, a potassium-based fire suppressor same size and weight as a standard electric torch can be included. It ensures an higher effectiveness compared with conventional 10–kilo (22 lb) fire extinguishers and preventing damage to hides and rugs. Engine Overheating First Aid Kit There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition: For versions/markets, where provided, a first aid kit is available in the trunk. This kit contains following: • sterile gauze to cover and clean the wounds; • bandages of various sizes; • treated adhesive bandages of various sizes; • an adhesive bandage strip; • a pair of rounded-end scissors; • gloves; • rescue blanket. To reduce potentially overheating of the engine in city traffic, while stationary, place the transmission in N (Neutral), but do not increase the engine idle speed. NOTE: • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat. • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system. CAUTION! Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gage reads “H” (refer to “Instrument Cluster” in section 4), pull (Continued) 238 In an Emergency (Continued) over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the temperature gage drops back into the normal range. If the temperature gage remains on the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer. WARNING! You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the engine lid, do not open it until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a coolant pressure cap (refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in section 7) when the radiator is overheated. In case of a Punctured Tire The vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel. Using the Compact Spare Wheel The compact spare wheel is stored in the trunk and is supplied deflated in order to limit the amount of space occupied. An electric compressor is also provided for inflating. In the event of a tire puncture, proceed as follows. • Stop the vehicle in a place that does not constitute a danger to traffic and where the wheel can be changed safely. The vehicle must be level and on firm ground. • Select the P (Park) mode and then engage manually the electric parking brake and move the ignition switch to OFF position. • If necessary, turn the hazard warning flashers on and place the warning triangle at the required distance. WARNING! • The jack should be used on level firm ground wherever possible. • It is recommended that the wheels of the vehicle be chocked, and that no person should remain in a vehicle that is being jacked. • If the vehicle has been stopped on a slope or an uneven surface, place chocks or other suitable items in front of or behind the wheels to stop the vehicle from moving. • Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack. • No person should place any portion of their body under a vehicle that is supported by a jack. • Lift the ground coverage of the trunk. • Remove the tool kit. 6 • Take the tools for changing the wheel from the container. 239 In an Emergency • a telescopic wrench with rubber coated handle for unscrewing/ tightening the wheel bolts; • an adapter to be fitted to the wrench for the wheel nuts; • a jack. • Unscrew and pull out the locking wheel knob. 6 • Take the container and the compact spare wheel out of the trunk. Container inserted in the compact spare wheel contains: • an electric compressor, complete with pressure gage and fitting for inflating the compact spare wheel; 240 • Lift the compressor cover and remove the hose with the pressure gage and the cable with a plug for the power outlet. • Unscrew the valve cap of the compact spare wheel and screw the fitting of the inflation hose onto the valve. • Insert the plug in one of the available power outlets fitted in the trunk or cabin. • Turn the compressor on by pressing the switch. • Stop the compressor pressing switch again, when the pressure indicated by the gage reaches the recommended level (see “Tire Inflation Pressure” in section 8) and screw the cap on the compact spare wheel valve. CAUTION! • In order to obtain a more accurate reading, the compressor should be switched off when checking the tire pressure of the compact spare wheel on the pressure gage. • Do not run the compressor for more than 20 minutes: there is a risk it could overheat. Also, prolonged power absorption may discharge the battery, subsequently preventing the engine from starting. • The compressor has been designed exclusively to inflate compact spare wheels; do not use it to inflate air mattresses, dinghies etc. In an Emergency • Fit the adapter on the wrench. Extend the wrench as shown, then loosen by approximately one turn, the five bolts on the wheel to be changed. • Place the jack near the wheel to be changed as illustrated. • Make sure that the head of the jack is correctly inserted in one of the slots beneath the sole bar. • Completely unscrew the five bolts and remove the wheel. In case a “Wheel Security Stud Bolt” is installed, it can only be removed by using the specific fitting wrench provided with “Wheel Security Stud Bolt Kit”, available in the Genuine Accessories range. • Fit the compact spare wheel with the valve stem facing outward, securing it with the five bolts previously removed. • Turn the lever of the jack to lower the vehicle and remove the jack. • Fully tighten the bolts, alternately tightening diametrically opposite. 6 WARNING! The lifted vehicle may fall and damage the vehicle's body if the jack is not positioned correctly. • Turn the jack lever until the wheel is raised a few centimeters off the ground. 241 In an Emergency will be compromised. Avoid accelerating to full speed, heavy braking and fast cornering. • Fully tighten the bolts, alternately tightening diametrically opposite. • The compact spare wheel must be inflated to the recommended tire pressure (see “Tire Inflation Pressure” in section 8). • For safety reasons, it is absolutely forbidden to drive with more than one compact spare wheel fitted on the vehicle. WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel bolts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. 6 WARNING! • The spare wheel is narrower than standard wheels and must only be used to travel the distance required to reach a service station, where the punctured tire can be repaired or replaced. • Do not exceed a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) when using the compact spare wheel; when this limit is exceeded, the stability, road holding and braking of the vehicle 242 • Snow chains cannot be fitted on the compact spare wheel. • The spare wheel can travel a maximum of 1,800 mi (3,000 km). To Refit the Standard Wheel with Repaired or Replaced Tire • Following the procedure and the caution described above, raise the vehicle and remove the compact spare wheel reusing the supplied wrench with adapter, suitably extended. • Fit the standard wheel with the repaired or replaced tire. • Tighten the original bolts on the wheel. • Lower the vehicle and remove the jack. WARNING! Observe the tightening torque for the bolts securing the wheels (72.3 ± 7 lb/ft / 98 ± 10 Nm). This is equivalent to a load of approximately 44 lb (20 kg) being placed on the handle of the wrench supplied when extended for use. Once finished: • completely deflate the compact spare wheel by pressing on the valve with the overhang of the valve cap; • place the compact spare wheel and tool container in the trunk; • fix everything in place with the locking knob; In an Emergency Emergency Release of the Parking Brake In the event the electric parking brake locks due to a total system failure (see “Parking Brake” in section 5), you need to release the parking brake by following one of the two following procedures in order to operate the vehicle. • place the compressor, the jack, the wrench and the adapter in the container inside the compact spare wheel; Manual Release • Lift the flap of the floor covering as indicated. To manually release the parking brake, it is necessary to use the special tool provided with the toolkit placed in the trunk (see “Tool Kit” in this section). 6 • reposition the tool kit; • lower the ground coverage at the bottom of the trunk. • Remove the underneath sound-absorbing layer, leveraging the two side grips. To release the brake manually, open the trunk lid (see “To enter the Trunk” in section 2) and proceed as follows: • Lift the front edge of the boot carpet releasing the two buttons indicated and fold it back. 243 In an Emergency Release after Battery Disconnection The following maneuver does not allow the full release of the parking brake but still allows for the vehicle to move, as e.g. to load it on rescue vehicles. • Remove the rubber inspection cover by pulling its tab in order to locate the actuator that controls the lock and unlock system of the parking brake. • Insert the hex tip of the flexible part of the special tool, inside the disclosed section. • Turn the handle of the special tool clockwise until release. 6 • Remove the protective cap by unscrew it counterclockwise using the hexagonal socket end of the special tool. 244 • Remove the special tool from its seat and seal with the cap. • Reassemble all parts removed for this operation. • Within 3 minutes after power off (ignition device OFF), reconnect the battery. • Turn the ignition switch in RUN position. • Press the brake pedal by simultaneously raising the EPB control for 5 seconds: the brake cables will loosen enabling the vehicle to be moved. WARNING! After each emergency release, the warning light and related break-down message will light up and display on the instrument cluster. The electric parking brake system remains inefficient and must be repaired by the Authorized Maserati Dealer to resume operation. In an Emergency Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position The manual disengagement of the shift from P (Park) has the purpose to allow pushing or towing the vehicle if not normally possible using the shift lever (such as inability to start the engine). The current device is exclusively intended for emergency situations. WARNING! Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake, before activating the manual park release. Activating the manual park release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake. Activating the manual park release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle. The lace that allows the emergency manual park release is located on the left part of the driver’s foot well. • Lift the mat on the driver side to access the lace. Freeing the Stuck Vehicle • Slip the lace from its seat. • With the tip of a screwdriver press the clip shown in the picture box and lift the lace up to release the transmission from the P (Park) position. The new position will allow vehicle towing. • Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle. If your vehicle is stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can probably be moved by a simple rocking motion. Steer the wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Shift then between D (Drive) or M (Manual) and R (Reverse) (see chapter “Automatic Transmission” in section 5). Shifting to M (Manual), try to free the car starting in second gear. At low speed motion of the vehicle, you can switch quickly from D (Drive) to R (Reverse), and vice versa, just by pressing the release button on the shift lever. For more effectiveness press lightly on the accelerator pedal in order to avoid driving wheel slippage. If unable to release the vehicle in one of the previously described ways, enter the low grip driving mode, by pressing the I C E, and completely exclude the yaw and slip control system, by pressing the button for 2 seconds. Moving the shift lever between D (Drive) and R (Reverse) to start. 6 Notes for AWD vehicle models On these vehicles slippage produced by low grip conditions, automatically activates the AWD mode. Using the 245 In an Emergency drive mode M (Manual), the insertion of AWD will happen immediately when engaging a forward gear. CAUTION! Racing the engine or spinning the drive wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in N (Neutral) for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle. 6 WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive drive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the drivetrain and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. Auxiliary Jump-Start Procedure If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-started using a set of jumper cables and a battery of another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster. It is necessary to have proper jumper cables in order to connect the booster battery to the remote posts of the discharged battery. Booster cables have usually positive and negative terminal clamps and are identified by a different from the sheath color (red = positive, black = negative). Maserati provides on request jumper cables created for its models and content in a pratical case. NOTE: The Authorized Maserati Dealer can provide you with information about the “Maserati Jumper Cables Kit”, available in the Genuine Accessories range. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the battery manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions. CAUTION! • To jump start a vehicle do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system of the vehicle with the dead battery may occur. • Do not use a battery charger for emergency starting under any circumstances. You could damage the electronic systems, particularly the control units managing the ignition and fuel supply functions. WARNING! • Do not attempt jump-starting if the discharged battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode during jump start and cause personal injury. (Continued) 246 In an Emergency (Continued) • Do not carry out this procedure if you have not done it before: incorrect maneuvers can originate high electrical discharges and even cause the battery to explode. • To avoid the risk of explosion or fire, do not approach the battery with open flames or cigarettes that could generate sparks. NOTE: If you need to disconnect the battery from the vehicle electrical system, see “Maintenance – Free Battery” in section 7). Battery Remote Posts Position Jump-Start Procedure For easier operation, remote battery posts for jumpstarting are located in the engine compartment while the battery is stored in the trunk. Open the engine lid (see “Open and Close the Engine Lid” in section 2) the positive remote post (+) and the negative remote post (-) are easily recognizable by the icons labeled on the integrated power module. WARNING! • Stay clear of the radiator cooling fan whenever the engine lid is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is on. You can be injured by the moving fan blades. • Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. • Do not allow the vehicles involved in the jumpstarting operation to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and cause personal injury. 6 • Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories. • Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into P (Park) and turn the ignition to OFF. • If using another vehicle to jumpstart the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach and set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. 247 In an Emergency • Disconnect the terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. • Connect one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive (+) remote post of the discharged vehicle after lifting the protection cap of the cable indicated on the external side of the integrated power module. 6 248 • Connect the opposite terminal clamp of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. • Connect one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery. • Connect the opposite terminal clamp of the negative (-) jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery as rendered. NOTE: • Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. If using a portable battery booster, wait a few seconds after connecting the cables, before starting the booster vehicle. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence. • Disconnect one terminal clamp of the negative (-) jumper cable from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery. • Disconnect the opposite terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery. • Disconnect one terminal clamp of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system inspected at an Authorized Maserati Dealer center. In an Emergency Towing a Disabled Vehicle Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only towing bars and other equipment designed for the purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Safety chains are mandatory. Securely attach a towing bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. Make sure you comply with local towing regulations. • If the vehicle's battery is discharged, refer to the following paragraph on how to shift the automatic transmission out of the P (Park) position and release the parking brake. • If the vehicle battery is still charged, turn off the engine and disengage the parking brake manually (if automatically engaged) by using the command behind the shift lever (see “Parking Brake” chapter in section 5). Shift then manually the transmission out of P (Park) as described in “Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position” chapter of this section. If you need to use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in RUN position, do not use the ACC position. CAUTION! Your vehicle is equipped with tow eyes, which are mounted in the front and the rear. Tow eyes are for emergency use only, for example to rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow eyes for tow truck hookup as you could damage your vehicle. Manual Release of Transmission and Parking Brake In order to push or tow the vehicle if unable to shift the transmission out of P (Park) (such as a discharged battery), a manual park release is available. In this case it is necessary to manually release the shift lever and the parking brake by applying the emergency procedure (see “Parking Brake” in section 5). Follow the steps as indicated in “Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position” in this section to manually disengage the transmission. Vehicle Towing Conditions Maserati does not recommend that you tow this vehicle on a tow dolly as vehicle damage may occur. Instead, it is recommended to tow your vehicle with all four wheels off the ground using a flatbed. If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is still operable, a RWD vehicle may be flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions. • The shift lever must be in N (Neutral). • The distance to be traveled must not exceed 30 mi (50 km). • The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). 6 CAUTION! AWD vehicle can be towed with both axles on the ground without limitations, single axle towing is forbidden as can seriously damage torque driver of AWD system. If the transmission is not operable, or the RWD vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph (50 km/h) or farther than 30 mi (50 km) (for example on a highway), tow with the rear driving 249 In an Emergency wheels off the ground and on a platform of a rescue vehicle, or with the rear wheels raised using a wheel lift. CAUTION! If you have to tow the RWD vehicle with 2 wheels raised, ensure that the ignition switch is in the OFF position. If this is not observed, when the ESC is active, the ECU will store a malfunction and the relative warning light will illuminate on the instrument cluster display. This requires the intervention of the Authorized Maserati Dealer to reset the system. 6 250 Use tow hook of the tool kit The tow hook is contained in the tool kit (see “Tool Kit” in this section) and must be screwed in its seat accessible behind the front grille, right-hand side. Carefully clean the threaded seat before tightening the hook. Screw the tow hook into its seat for approximately 11 turns. NOTE: Maximum work angle of towing cable: 15°. 7 – Maintenance and Care Scheduled Maintenance Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Scheduled Service Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 A/C System Maintenance . . . . . . . Wheels Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . Bodywork Maintenance and Care Interior Maintenance and Care . . Vehicle Stored for Long Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 279 281 283 284 Battery Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 251 Maintenance and Care Scheduled Maintenance Service Correct maintenance is clearly the best way to ensure vehicle performance and safety features, ensure respect for the environment and low operating costs. NOTE: Also remember that the strict observance of the maintenance procedures is essential for keeping your vehicle operating properly. Not adhering to the Maintenance Schedule can impact your vehicle’s warranty. 7 Maserati has therefore provided for a series of checks and maintenance operations involving the 1st service when the vehicle mileage reaches 12,500 mi (20,000 km) or after 1 year of the vehicle's life, and subsequently every 12,500 mi (20,000 km) or every year. After the 6th Maintenance Service After the 6th service, maintenance must be restarted with the operations scheduled for the 1st, 2nd and 3rd service. 252 CAUTION! The Scheduled Maintenance services are prescribed by the Maserati. Failure to have the services carried out may affect your warranty. The Scheduled Maintenance service is provided by the Authorized Maserati Dealer. If further replacements or repairs are found to be necessary when a service is performed in addition to the scheduled operations, these can be carried out only with the specific consent of the Customer. CAUTION! You are advised to notify the Authorized Maserati Dealer of any minor operating problem, without waiting for the next scheduled service. The oil change indicator system will remind you of the deadline for the maintenance program. The indicator light on the Instrument cluster flashes for approximately 10 seconds displaying the “Oil Change Due” message backed by a beeping sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary. The oil change indicator message will illuminate at approximately 11,900 mi (19,200 km) after the last oil change was performed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within 500 mi (800 km). NOTE: • The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time (only mileage) elapsed from the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil if it has been 1 year since your last oil change, even if the oil change indicator message will NOT display on the instrument cluster. • Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off-road for an extended period of time or short trips without reaching operation temperature. • Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 12,500 mi (20,000 km) or at least after 1 year. The Authorized Maserati Dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. CAUTION! Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle. Maintenance and Care Scheduled Service Plan The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability. at your selling dealer. The technicians at your dealership know your vehicle best, and have access to factoryapproved information, genuine Maserati parts, and specially designed electronic and mechanical tools that can help prevent future costly repairs. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip driving. Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected. Maserati recommends that these maintenance intervals be performed Service coupons Main operations Belt for alternator, water pump, air conditioning compressor and hydraulic steering pump Engine oil and filter 1° 2° 3° 4° 5° 6° Interval running coupons: every 12,500 mi (20,000 km) or 1 year I R I Replace at least every 50,000 mi (80,000 km) or 4 years and every time the part is removed R R R R R R Replace at least every year Cooling system connections and lines (check for leaks) I Air filter R Spark plugs R R Hydraulic steering fluid level (bleed if necessary) I I I Engine coolant level I I I Intercooler check for leaks I I I I I 7 I Brake fluid level I R I Brake system: lines, calipers, connections - Efficiency of the dashboard warning lights - Handbrake operation I I I Wear condition of the braking parts (discs, pads) I I I 253 Maintenance and Care Service coupons Main operations 1° 2° 3° R Controls and adjustment systems in general, hinges, doors, front and rear lid I Headlight aiming I R 254 R I I I I I I I I Vehicle road test 7 6° I Condition of the leather interiors I = Inspect and carry out any other necessary operation R = Replace 5° Interval running coupons: every 12,500 mi (20,000 km) or 1 year Pollen filter Check with Maserati Diagnosis 4° I I I I I I I Maintenance and Care Periodic Maintenance Every 600 mi (1,000 km) or before long journeys Check: • engine coolant; • brake fluid; • windshield washer fluid level; • tire inflation pressure and condition; • operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning flashers, etc.); • operation of windshield washer/wiper system and wear of windshield wiper blades. Every 1,900 mi (3,000 km) Check and top off, if required, the engine oil level. Heavy-Duty Vehicle Use If the car is mainly used under one of the following conditions: • off-roads; • short, repeated journeys (less than 4–5 mi / 7-8 km) at sub-zero outside temperatures; • engine often idling or driving long distances at low speeds or long periods of idleness. You should perform the following inspections more frequently than recommended on the “Scheduled Service Plan”: On Board Diagnostic System — OBD II • check front disc brake pad conditions and wear; • check cleanliness of hood and trunk locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage; • visually inspect conditions of: engine, transmission, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel system - brakes) and rubber elements (boots - sleeves - bushes - etc.); • check battery charge; • visually inspect condition of the accessory drive belts; • check and, if necessary, change engine oil and replace oil filter; • check and, if necessary, replace pollen filter of the A/C system; • check and, if necessary, replace air cleaner filter. This vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions suited to current government regulations. If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” on the instrument cluster display (refer to “Instrument Cluster” in section 4). The system stores as well diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician by performing repairs. Although the vehicle will be drivable and will not need towing, contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer for service as soon as possible. CAUTION! All maintenance operations for the vehicle must be carried out by an Authorized Maserati Dealer. Do not carry any operation on your own and contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer. 7 255 Maintenance and Care CAUTION! on • Prolonged driving with the could cause further damage to the emissions control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed. • If the is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service at an Authorized Maserati Dealer is required. Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs 7 256 In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing. Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following: 1. Press the ignition device to the RUN position, but do not crank or start the engine. 2. As soon as you press the ignition device to turn the engine On, you will see the MIL remain illuminated for 15 seconds, this is a normal bulb check. 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen: • The MIL will remain illuminated and a message error will appear on your instrument cluster. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station. • The MIL will turn Off. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an Authorized Maserati Dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready. Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running. Spare Parts Use of genuine parts for normal/ scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure excellent performance. Damage or failures caused by non-genuine spare parts used for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer's warranty. Maintenance and Care Dealer Service The Authorized Maserati Dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself. Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you. Maintenance Procedures The following pages contain the “required” maintenance standards determined by Maserati engineers. Besides those maintenance items specified in the “Scheduled Service Plan”, there are other components which may require service or replacement in the future. To perform most of the services, it is necessary to open the engine lid (see “Open and Close the Engine Lid” in section 2). chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damages are not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure. CAUTION! WARNING! You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Take your vehicle to an Authorized Maserati Dealer. • Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by the Authorized Maserati Dealer or a qualified repair center. • Your vehicle has been equipped with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes for washing as the 7 257 Maintenance and Care The images below show the position of all components involved in the maintenance service. V8 Engine 1 Inspection cover to access the engine oil level dipstick. 2 Engine oil filler neck. 3 Power steering fluid reservoir. 4 Engine coolant reservoir. 5 Coolant reservoir for transmission and hydraulic steering system. 6 Washer fluid reservoir. 7 Brake fluid reservoir access cover. 8 A/C pollen filter access cover. 9 Integrated power module (fuses). 10 Air cleaner filters. 7 V8 Engine 258 Maintenance and Care V6 Engine 1 Engine oil level dipstick. 2 Engine oil filler neck. 3 Power steering fluid reservoir. 4 Engine coolant reservoir. 5 Coolant reservoir for transmission and hydraulic steering system. 6 Washer fluid reservoir. 7 Brake fluid reservoir access cover. 8 A/C pollen filter access cover. 9 Integrated power module (fuses). 10 Air cleaner filters. 7 V6 Engine 259 Maintenance and Care Level Checks ENVIRONMENTAL! • The engine oils and fluids used contain substances that are dangerous for the environment. For replacement you are advised to contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer, where all the necessary equipment is available to dispose of the used oil and fluids in compliance with the regulations in force and in an environment-friendly manner. • All equipment used for fluids replacement (gloves, cloths, containers, etc) must be disposed in compliance with the regulations in force. Engine Coolant Level Check 7 260 Your vehicle has been equipped with an improved engine coolant (antifreeze) that offers high protection against corrosion, freezing and allows extended maintenance intervals. To prevent reducing extended maintenance periods, it is important to use original engine coolant (antifreeze) when adding coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze) use pure water only such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of impure water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system. • Mix a minimum solution of 50% engine coolant (antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (do not exceed 70%) if temperatures below −35°F (−37°C) are forecast. Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the circulation area of the vehicle. The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method to determine that the coolant level is adequate. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle only needs to be checked once a month. With the engine off and cold, the level of the coolant in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle and inside the filler neck. • When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle after removing the cap. Do not overfill. • Once the desired level is reached, firmly close cap of the bottle. • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the Maintenance and Care The brake pads wear could cause the fluid level to fall. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a requires accurate checkup of the braking system. engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks by an Authorized Maserati Dealer. • Keep the front of the radiator and the condenser clean. WARNING! • Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap of the engine coolant bottle to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. • When adding coolant do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level immediately if the brake system warning light and the related message turn on indicating a low level of brake fluid. • Remove the brake fluid reservoir access cover. • Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. • Add fluid to bring the level up to the “MAX” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir. Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid (see “Refillings” in section 8). • Add enough fluid to bring it to the “MAX” level marked on the brake fluid reservoir. • Once the correct level is reached, firmly close the cap. CAUTION! The symbol on the reservoir cap identifies the synthetic type of brake fluid, distinguishing it from the mineral type. Using mineral fluids damages the special rubber linings of the brake system irreparably. WARNING! • To avoid contamination from foreign materials or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in an open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in an accident. 7 (Continued) 261 Maintenance and Care To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers. (Continued) • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, make sure it does not spill over these surfaces. NOTE: • Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in an accident. The Authorized Maserati Dealer can provide you with information about the Maserati recommended Windshield Washer Fluid with antifreeze, available in the Genuine Accessories range. Adding Washer/Headlight Washer Fluid 7 During scheduled services or when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears together with the related telltale add more fluid as soon as possible: the fluid reservoir will hold nearly 4 Quarts/Litres of washer/headlight washer fluid. • Remove the reservoir cap in the engine compartment and lift the filler neck. 262 • Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (refer to “Refillings” in section 8) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water. • When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help blade performance. WARNING! • Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or when working around the washer solution. • Do not drive with the windshield washer fluid reservoir empty: the action of the washer is essential for improving visibility when driving. Maintenance and Care Engine Oil Level Check To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle's engine, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. If the warning light illuminates and the related message of low oil level displays, or during scheduled services (see “Scheduled Maintenance Service” in this section) it is necessary to check the engine oil level. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight. In both cases the vehicle should be parked on level ground to improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. • Remove the dipstick and clean it with a dry and clean cloth. • If a refilling is necessary, unscrew the filler neck cap. V8 Engine • Remove the inspection cover on the right engine bank (V8 Engine). V8 Engine V6 Engine 7 • Re-insert the dipstick completely and remove: the oil level should maintain between the MIN e MAX reference ranges (SAFE range). V8 Engine 263 Maintenance and Care pressure. This could damage your engine. • Do not add any supplemental materials to the engine oil, other than leak detection dyes. Engine oil is an engineered product, and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. V6 Engine 7 • Adding 1.5 Quarts / 1.4 Litres (V8 Engine), 1.1 Quarts / 1 Litre (V6 Engine) of oil when the level is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in the level being at the top of the SAFE range. • Return the cap and dipstick to their position and wait for a few minutes to allow the oil to reach the oil pan. • Check the level again. • Refit the inspection cover (V8 Engine). CAUTION! • Do not top up with oil with different characteristics than the engine in the car (refer to “Refillings” in section 8). • Overfilling or underfilling the sump will cause aeration or loss of oil 264 Engine oil filter replacement The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every oil change. Contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer to perform this service. Automatic Transmission Oil Check • Retighten the cap then unscrew it again and check the level: it should match the “MAX” notch marked on the dipstick. In hot oil conditions, the level may even exceed the “MAX” notch. Contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer for the oil level check. Power Steering Fluid Level Check With the vehicle on a level ground and the engine cold, check the fluid level of the power steering reservoir. • To carry out the check, unscrew the cap, clean the dipstick with a dry and clean cloth. • If necessary, top up with fluid making sure that it has the same characteristics as the one already used in the system (refer to “Refillings” in section 8). Maintenance and Care Engine Air Filters Replacement CAUTION! • Make sure that the power steering fluid does not come in touch with the engine hot parts as it is flammable. • When the engine is running, do not keep the steering wheel completely turned for longer than 8 seconds, unless absolutely necessary. This will cause a noise and also the overheating of the hydraulic steering fluid and could damage the hydraulic steering system. Coolant, Transmission and Hydraulic Steering System Fluid Level Check Contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer for this operation. Contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer to have the air filters replaced. • Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover. A/C Air Filter Replacement This filter performs mechanic/ electrostatic air filtering, provided that windows and doors are perfectly closed. The filter is located under the engine lid in the external A/C system air inlet, on the passenger side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. To replace the filter during the scheduled maintenance services or after the vehicle has been heavily used on dusty roads, proceed as follows: • Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips indicated. • Remove the used filter slipping it off from within the air intake. • Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this). 7 265 Maintenance and Care • Close the filter access cover and reinstall the access door. use the “Service” position for any intervention on the wipers blades. Windshield Wiper Maintenance CAUTION! Failure to replace the filter may considerably reduce the air conditioning and heating system efficiency. Windshield Wiper Maintenance and Blades Replacement When the wiper arms are in “Park” position it is not possible to check or replace the blades as they remain under the engine hood. To service the blades it is necessary to move the wiper arms in “Service” position (see chapter “Windshield Wipers and Washers” in section 3). In this way it is possible to turn and lift the arms for the desired intervention. 7 WARNING! It is dangerous to operate or service the wiper blades with the wipers in an active position (different than “OFF”) and with the ignition switch in the RUN position. The rain sensors may suddenly activate the wipers. Always 266 Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on the geographical area’s weather conditions where the car is used and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace if necessary. Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film. Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. Spray nozzles If the jet does not work, first check that there is fluid in the pan (see paragraph “Level checks” in this section) then check that the nozzles are not clogged. Blades Replacement • Move the wiper arms into “Service” position, (see chapter “Windshield Wipers and Washers” in section 3) and lift them. • Press the indicated button, slip off the blade support from the arm and replace it. • Return the blade to its original position on the windshield. • Turn the multifunction lever to one of the automatic settings (see chapter “Windshield Wipers and Washers” in section 3) and move the ignition switch to the RUN position: the wiper arms will return to the resting position. Maintenance and Care Maintenance-Free Battery NOTE: Due to the difficulty of this operation, we recommend that you contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer for replacement of the blades. Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, to assure quite, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. The external lock cylinders of the front doors should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of high quality lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. WARNING! CALIFORNIA proposition 65. Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm. This vehicle is equipped with a sealed type maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required. WARNING! • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or damage the eyes. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean with the face over a battery. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. 7 • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling the battery. • The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be (Continued) 267 Maintenance and Care positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. (Continued) replaced with a component of the same type (vented). NOTE: Remote battery terminals for start are located in the engine compartment for jump starting to be used with an auxiliary battery or a battery from another vehicle (see “Auxiliary Jump-Start Procedure” chapter in section 6). CAUTION! To Disconnect the Battery The battery is fitted on the inner right side of the trunk. To access the battery it is necessary to lift the ground coverage of the trunk and remove the access cover as indicated. 7 268 • Before disconnecting the battery, open the trunk lid and lower the windows a few centimeters. • Never disconnect the battery from the electrical system when the engine is running. • To temporarily disconnect the vehicle electrical system from the battery, simply remove the cable end with quick coupling from the negative post (-) of the battery. • If the battery needs to be removed from its compartment, you must first detach the terminal clamp to the negative post (–) and then the other terminal clamp to the positive post (+), after removing the protection cover. Battery posts are marked NOTE: After the battery is disconnected with electric parking brake engaged, you can manually move the vehicle by performing the procedure “Release after Battery Disconnection” in chapter “Emergency Release of the Parking Brake” of section 6. Maintenance and Care To Reconnect the Battery NOTE: When the battery cables have been disconnected and the trunk has been locked, it is necessary to pull the emergency release lever in order to re-open it. To access the trunk and operate the emergency release fold the rear seatback (see “Cargo Area” chapter in section 3). CAUTION! • It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is precisely attached to the positive post (+) and the negative cable is attached to the negative post (–). • Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. After the battery has been disconnected and re-connected and before starting the engine it is necessary to proceed as follows: • Unlock the trunk lid with the key fob RKE transmitter and then lock it manually. • Initialize the climate control system by activating the compressor (see chapter "Air Conditioning Controls" in section 4). • Turn on the MTC and set the date and time following the MTC instructions manual. • Lift, release and lift again the lever located behind the shift lever to inizialize the electric parking brake. In this way the warning light on the instrument panel will turn off. Useful Advice to Extend Battery Life When parking the vehicle, make sure that the doors, front, rear lids and flaps are properly closed. All interior lights should be off. When the engine is turned off, do not keep the connected devices switched on for a long time (such as radio, hazard warning flashers, blower, etc.). CAUTION! If the battery charge remains below 50% for a long period of time, it will be damaged due to sulfation; its performance and starting power will be reduced and it will be more subject to freezing (this can happen even at 14°F / -10°C). We recommend you to have the battery charge condition checked, preferably at the beginning of the cold season, to prevent the electrolyte from freezing. This check should be carried out more frequently if the vehicle is used mainly for short trips or if it is equipped with power absorbing devices that remain permanently on even when the ignition switch is off. This applies above all if these devices have been retrofitted ("Aftermarket" services). If the vehicle is not used for long periods of time, please see “Vehicle Stored for Long Periods” in this section. 7 • Unlock and lock the doors using the Key fob RKE Transmitter. 269 Maintenance and Care Battery Recharge The vehicle is equipped with a IBS (Intelligent Battery Sensor) sensor able to measure charging and discharging currents and to calculate the state of charge and state of health of the battery. This sensor is located in correspondence of the negative post (-) of the battery. For a successful charge/recharge operation, the charging current must flow through the IBS sensor as shown in the picture. 7 CAUTION! • When charging the battery with an external charger, to allow IBS to measure charging current, the negative terminal clamp of the charger must NOT be connected 270 directly to the negative post of the battery, because in this case charging current does not flow through IBS. • The negative terminal clamp of the charger MUST be connected just after IBS: in this way charging current flows through IBS, and it can correctly measure it. • Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. Recharge the battery slowly and at a low amperage with a suitable charger or use a charge maintainer device (for further information refer to “Maintaining Battery Charge” in chapter “Battery Statement”). It is possible to recharge the battery without disconnecting the cables of the vehicle electrical system from it. • To access the battery lift the ground coverage of the trunk compartment and remove the access cover as previously shown. • Remove the protection cover and connect the terminal clamp of the charger positive cable (typically in red) to the positive post (+) of the battery. • Connect the terminal clamp of the charger negative cable (typically in black) to the nut located by the negative post (-) on the battery, indicated in the picture. • Turn the charger on and follow the instructions on its user manual to completely recharge the battery. • When the battery is recharged, turn off the battery charger before disconnecting it from the battery. • Disconnect first the terminal clamp of the charger black cable from the battery and then the terminal clamp of the red cable. • Reassemble the protection cover on the battery positive post and the access cover on the battery room. Maintenance and Care Fuse Replacement Used Fuses Characteristics When an electrical device is not functioning, check that the corresponding fuse is in proper working order (intact). A Fuse intact B Fuse blown Replace the faulty fuse with a new one featuring the same rating, by using appropriate forceps added in the integrated power module and inside the cover of the rear power distribution center. Type The color identifies the value of the fuses in amperes which is also reported on the them. The vehicle is endowed mainly with mini-and maxi-fuses. In addition to these fuses there are some special fuses (“Circuit Breaker” or “non-Cycling Breakers” identified with CB in the description) on which it is not possible to visually detect the status of “fuse blown”. These fuses contained in the rear power distribution center remain tripped as long as there’s power to the circuit. They protect the motors that move the seats: in case of failure of a seat, extract the corresponding fuse and then reinsert it. If the malfunction persists, contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer. The table shows the match between color and amperage of mini and maxi fuses. 7 Color / Ampere Mini Fuse Beige - 5 Brown - 7.5 Red - 10 Blue - 15 Yellow - 20 Maxi Fuse Yellow - 20 Green - 30 Orange - 40 Red - 50 Blue - 60 White - 25 Green - 30 271 Maintenance and Care CAUTION! • Never replace a blown fuse with anything other than a new and suitable fuse (same rating). • After replacing a fuse, if the fault recurs, contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer. 7 272 Position of Fuses Integrated Power Module The fuses are located in two parts of the vehicle, namely: • To access the module it is necessary to lift the engine lid (see “Trunk Compartment Operation” in section 2). • To access the fuses remove the module cover unhooking the lateral locks as shown in the picture. • inside the integrated power module, on the right hand side of the engine compartment; • inside the rear power distribution center, behind the battery, on the right hand side of the trunk. Maintenance and Care The table points out the position as featured in the figure, the type and function of the fuses included in the integrated power module. CAUTION! Ref. Type Function 22 Maxi – 20A RH low beam relay input 28 Mini – 7.5A IPC Instrument Panel Control 33 Mini – 10A HDLP Headlights • After replacement, refit the protective cover of the module. • If you need to wash the engine compartment, do not direct the jet of water for too long directly on the module. Ref. Type Function 10 Mini – 15A Electric Steering Lock 11 Mini – 20A Horn relay input 12 Mini – 10A AC compressor relay input 14 Mini – 7.5A Alarm siren 19 Headlamp Maxi – 30A washer relay input 20 Maxi – 30A Wiper motor relay output 21 Maxi – 20A LH low beam relay input 7 273 Maintenance and Care Rear Power Distribution Center • To access the center it is necessary to lift the ground coverage of the trunk and remove the access cover (refer “Maintenance-Free Battery” in this section). • To access the fuses unhooking the cover lock shown in picture. • Lift the lid on the side of the latch and push it toward the right side to release the latches as indicated on the unit. 7 274 The table points out the position as featured in the figure, the type and function of the fuses on the rear area distribution control unit. Ref. Type Function 6 Maxi – 20A Sunroof 7 Maxi – 30A Driver door module Ref. Type Function 8 Maxi – 30A 11 High Premium Maxi – 40A stereo amplifier unit 15 Maxi – 40A Passenger door module HVAC front blower relay coil Maintenance and Care Ref. Type Function 17 Maxi – 30A Rear LH door module 18 Maxi – 30A Rear RH door module 27 CB – 20A LH rear seat movement 31 CB – 25A LH front seat movement 33 CB – 20A RH rear seat movement 35 Mini – 20A Rear doors sunshade 37 Mini – 20A Radio 38 CB – 25A 45 Mini – 10A Internal mirror, sunroof 46 Mini – 5A Rear camera 61 Mini – 25A Front console power outlet and cigar lighter 68 Mini – 20A Rear sunshade module Ref. Type 69 Mini – 25A Rear console power outlet and cigar lighter Mini – 10A HVAC module, AFLM headlights module, Parking Aid Module PAM 70 Function Bulb Replacement The signal failure of an external light (turn signal, low beam and high beam, number plate light, reverse light and brake light) is communicated to the instrument cluster that displays on the TFT screen in a graphical form and with a text message which light is faulty (see example in the figure). RH front seat movement 7 275 Maintenance and Care Front Headlights The light bulbs of the headlight clusters are arranged as follows: 1 Bi-Xenon low-beam/high-beam bulb. 2 Position/parking and DRL LED lights. Except for Canadian vehicles (always enabled) the DRL lights can be deactivated through the Multi Media System (see “MTC Settings” in section 4). 3 Turn signal LED. 4 Side-marker light bulb. 5 Side reflex-reflector. 7 CAUTION! Due to the complexity of the operation, for the replacement of the 276 headlight clusters light bulbs, we recommend that you contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer. If you are personally carrying out this operation, make sure that the corresponding fuse is intact before replacing the bulb. Use only genuine new light bulbs with the same characteristics as the old one. Tail-Light Clusters Light Bulbs The taillight bulbs are arranged as follows: 1 Position/parking light guide LED. 2 Stop light LED. 3 Side-marker LED. 4 Turn signal LED. 5 Reverse LED. 6 Reflectors. 7 Rear fog LED. Light Clusters Bulbs Replacement WARNING! The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch and the ignition switch off. Because of this, you should not attempt to replace a headlamp bulb yourself, but take the vehicle to an Authorized Maserati Dealer for service. All lamps of the rear and some of front the headlights and those integrated in the exterior mirrors are LED powered and cannot be replaced individually. Contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer to locate the correct parts and replace them. Maintenance and Care License Plate Lights To replace the license plate light bulb (C 5W): • use a screwdriver positioned at the indicated point to lever out the light fixing frame; Interior Lights • rotate the bulb holder and take it out; CAUTION! Before replacing a bulb, ensure that the matching fuse is intact. For replacement, use only original new light bulbs having the same rating as the old one. Lamps inside the glove box compartments of the dashboard are LED powered and cannot be replaced by the owner. Contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer to replace them. • replace the pressure-fitted bulb; Courtesy Lights (below Door) • replace the pressure-fitted bulb; • refit the bulb holder inserting first the electrical connector side and then pressing on the other side to hook up the clip. To replace the bulb (W5W): • use a screwdriver positioned at the indicated point to lever out the light fixing frame; • refit the bulb holder inserting first the electrical connector side and then pressing on the other side to hook up the clip. 7 277 Maintenance and Care Trunk Light To replace the bulbs (W5W) inside the trunk, proceed as follows after trunk lid opening. • Remove the light fixing frame by levering it out gently at the indicated point with a screwdriver. • Raise the lens cover. 7 • Replace the pressure-fitted bulb. 278 • Refit the lens cover, inserting first the electrical connector side and then pressing on the other side. A/C System Maintenance For best performances, the air conditioning system should be checked and serviced by the Authorized Maserati Dealer at the beginning of the warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. During the winter, the air conditioning system should be operated at least once a month for about 10 minutes. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Maintenance and Care Wheels Maintenance WARNING! • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, causing injuries. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician. internal damage, which may even lead to the tire destruction. Tires Maintenance CAUTION! To obtain the best performances and the longest mileage from the tires, take the following precautions during the first 310 mi (500 km): • do not drive at the vehicle’s maximum speed; • drive at low speed on curves; • avoid sudden steering; • avoid sudden braking; • avoid sudden acceleration; • do not drive at high speeds for too long. The tires inflation pressure must correspond to the prescribed values (see the chapter “Tire Inflation Pressure” in section 8) and should be checked only when the tires have cooled down. In fact, the pressure increases as the tire temperature progressively increases. Never reduce the pressure if tires are hot (see “Tires – General information” chapter in section 5). Insufficient tire inflating pressure can cause tire overheating and possible CAUTION! After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage it. Impacts with curbs, holes, and obstacles in the road, and prolonged trips on rough roads can cause tire damage which may not be visible to the naked eye. Check your tires regularly for any signs of damage (e.g. scratches, cuts, cracks, bulges, etc.). If sharp objects penetrate the tires, they can cause structural damage which is only visible when the tire is removed. In any case, any possible damage must be inspected by an experienced tire fitter, as it may seriously reduce the tire life. Remember that tires deteriorate with time, even if used little or not at all. Cracks in the tire tread and sides, alongside possible bulging, are a sign of deterioration. 7 279 Maintenance and Care WARNING! Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires, and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires. WARNING! • Check the inflating pressure of the tires when cold, at least every two weeks and before long trips. 7 • Have the old tires inspected by an experienced tire fitter, to make sure they can still be used safely. If the same tire has been on your vehicle for 4 or 5 years, have it inspected anyway by an experienced tire fitter. • Never fit tires of uncertain origin. • “Directional” tires have an arrow on their side showing the rolling direction. To keep the best performance when replacing a tire, 280 make sure that the rolling direction corresponds to the one shown by the arrow. • During the tire life, the rolling direction used for the first fitting shall always be observed, also in case of “nondirectional” tires. • Check the depth of the tire tread at regular intervals. The minimum allowed value is 0.06 in (1.6 mm) at that point the wear indicators on the tire will be visible (see “Tires – general information” in section 5). The thinner is the tread, the greater is the risk of skidding. • Drive carefully on wet roads to decrease the risk of aquaplaning. Winter Tires These tires are specially designed for driving on snow and ice and are fitted to replace the ones supplied with the vehicle. The winter features of these tires are significantly reduced when tread depth is less than 0.16 in (4 mm). In this case, they should be replaced. The specific features of the winter tires lead to lower performance under normal environmental conditions or on long highway trips, compared to the standard tires. Therefore, their use should be limited to the situations and performance for which they have been type-approved. The Authorized Maserati Dealer can provide all necessary information about fitting winter tires on the vehicle. Wheel Trims Maintenance All wheel trims should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water. To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner that may involve and damage the brake calipers. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel trim protective finish. Maintenance and Care Bodywork Maintenance and Care Protection from Atmospheric Agents The main causes of corrosion are: • atmospheric pollution; • salinity and humidity in the atmosphere (marine areas or a damp climate); • seasonal environmental conditions; • salt scattered on the roadbed to melt ice and snow. The abrasive action of wind-carried atmospheric dust and sand, mud and stones should not be underestimated. On this vehicle, Maserati has adopted the best technological solutions to protect the bodywork from corrosion. The main measures are: • paint products and systems that give the vehicle particular resistance to corrosion and abrasion; • use of galvanized (or pre-treated) metal sheets which are highly resistant to corrosion in the most exposed parts; • spraying of the underbody, engine compartment, insides of wheel housings, and other structures with wax products having high protective power; • spraying of plastic materials, with a protective function, in the most exposed points: underneath the doors, inside part of the mud guards, edges, etc.; • use of ventilated box sections, coated with protective wax products, to avoid condensation and trapped water which could encourage the formation of internal rust. Useful Advice to Keep the Bodywork in Good Condition Paint The paintwork does not only have an aesthetic function but also protects the underlying metal sheets. In the event of abrasions or deep scratches, we recommend to have the necessary touch-ups made immediately, to avoid any rust formation. Touch-ups do not feature particular difficulties, even on metallic finishes. For all paint touch-ups, use only original products indicated on the plate applied on the trunk lid. Normal paint maintenance consists in washing, the frequency of which depends on the conditions of use and of the environment. For example, if driving the vehicle in areas where there is high atmospheric pollution or the roads are spread with anti-freeze salt, it is advisable to wash the vehicle more frequently. ENVIRONMENTAL! Detergents pollute water. Therefore the vehicle should be washed in areas equipped for the collection and purification of the fluids used for washing. 7 281 Maintenance and Care NOTE: The use of alcohol-based products for cleaning the metal plates in the engine compartment and/or the trunk may deteriorate the painted surface. It is recommended to use water-based products and neutral surfactants. Car Wash For correct washing: 7 282 • wet the bodywork with a low pressure water jet; • pass a sponge with a light detergent solution over the bodywork, frequently rinsing the sponge; • rinse well with water and dry with an air jet or chamois leather. When drying, take particular care with the parts that are less visible, such as the door and lid bays, headlight edges, in which water can be trapped more easily. You are recommended not to take the vehicle immediately into an enclosed environment, but leave it in the open air so as to allow the water to evaporate. Do not wash the vehicle after it has been left in the sun or when the engine lid is hot: the paint gloss could be affected. External plastic parts must be cleaned with the same procedure followed for the normal washing of the vehicle. Avoid, as far as possible, parking the vehicle under trees; the resinous substances that very often drop from the trees give the paint a dull appearance and increase the possibility of originating corrosive processes. It is important that the drain holes in the lower sides of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk bottom be kept clear and open. CAUTION! • Bird droppings must be washed off immediately and thoroughly, since their acidity is particularly corrosive. • To provide better protection for the paint, polish the vehicle at intervals with a suitable product leaving a protective film on the paint. • If the vehicle is washed using high-pressure water jets or cleaners, it is important that the nozzle of the jet be kept at a distance of at least 16 in (40 cm) from the bodywork to avoid damaging it. NOTE: If you wish to keep the RKE Transmitter with you or anywhere outside the vehicle while the car is being washed, it is advisable to disable the Passive Entry from the MTC system, for further information refer to chapter “MTC settings” in section 4. Pre-Short Drop Function When in a car washing, if the driver keeps the RKE Transmitter in his/her pocket, or in any place outside the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) distance, the front windows will perform a pre-short drop. This is a shorter drop compared to the normal Short Drop performed by the Passive Entry function when you grab the door handle to enter the vehicle. This prevents water to enter the vehicle between the upper edge of the glass window and the door trim. NOTE: When deactivating the Passive Entry, also the Pre-Short Drop function will be disabled. Maintenance and Care Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. Engine Compartment At the end of each winter season, carefully wash the engine compartment, remembering to avoid directing the jet of water for too long on the electric parts. To perform this operation, you must contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer. Interior Maintenance and Care Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth. Do not use harsh cleaners. The leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils stains can be removed easily with a soft cloth and appropriate products. Avoid soaking the leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition. Check at regular intervals that there is no water trapped under the mats (due to drips off shoes, umbrellas etc.) which may cause the metal parts to oxidize. 7 283 Maintenance and Care CAUTION! Do not use alcohol, gasoline or solvents to clean the instrument panel's transparent dome, the MTC display and the leather upholstery. Leather Upholstery Treatment Have the leather upholstery only treated, as provided in the Scheduled Service Plan, by the Authorized Maserati Dealer which has the required specific products. Parts in Premium Quality Wood Remove any dirt with a buckskin leather or damp cloth. NOTE: 7 284 The Authorized Maserati Dealer can provide you with any information about the Maserati approved “Car Care” products, available in the Genuine Accessories range. Vehicle Stored for Long Periods If the vehicle is going to be stored for over a month, follow the below precautions: • Wash and dry the vehicle thoroughly. • Store the vehicle in a covered, dry and, if possible, ventilated area. • Select P (Park) and turn off the engine. • Disconnect the battery (refer to “Maintenance-Free Battery” in this section) or connect a battery charger (refer to paragraph “Maintaining Battery Charge” in this section). • Check the battery charge status. During garaging, this check must be carried out every three weeks. Recharge the battery if the no-load voltage is less than 12.5 V. • Check that the parking brake is NOT engaged. • Do not empty the engine cooling system. • Clean and protect the painted parts applying protective wax. • Clean and protect polished metal parts with special products available on the market. • Talc the windshield wiper blades and raise them from the windshield. • Cover the vehicle with a long cloth in breathable fabric (available from the Authorized Maserati Dealer). Do not use thick plastic sheets, which do not allow the humidity on the vehicle surface to evaporate. • Inflate the tires up to a pressure which must be 14.5 PSI (1 bar) higher than the normally prescribed one, and check it at regular intervals. NOTE: The Authorized Maserati Dealer can provide you with any information about the available “Indoor and Outdoor Car Covers”, available in the Genuine Accessories range. WARNING! The tire pressure must be brought back to the prescribed value before reusing the vehicle (see “Tire Inflation Pressure” in section 8). Maintenance and Care Battery Statement Battery State of Charge To avoid problems with ignition and/or the electrical system in general when you are driving, the battery charge status is constantly maintained and guaranteed by the vehicle's recharge circuit; the main component of which is the alternator. This circuit is only able to supply voltage to the battery when the vehicle is traveling. The warning light on the instrument cluster, will indicate any malfunctions in the recharge circuit or an insufficient battery charge status (shown in figure). The amount of voltage that is supplied to the battery to maintain the charge status also depends on the amount of charge absorbed by the systems used in the vehicle, for example: the air conditioning system, the lights, windshield wipers, the audio system etc. In addition to this, even the traffic conditions you are driving in can influence the amount of charge produced: if, for example, you are traveling on the highway, the alternator supplies more voltage to the battery, whilst in heavy traffic, where the vehicle is continually stopping and starting, the alternator provides less charge. This also applies for the amount of electrical charge stored in the battery to power other electrical devices whilst the vehicle is traveling. The vehicle is fitted with advanced electronic systems, such as, for example, the alarm system and various electronic control modules, which consume power even when the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the vehicle is not being used. Therefore, it is fundamental that the battery is properly charged to ensure that the engine starts properly and that all the electrical/electronic systems in the vehicle work efficiently. Maintaining Battery Charge When the vehicle is not going to be used for one week or more, or if you travel approximately 10 miles / 16 km per day and/or 4,000 miles / 6,000 km per year, Maserati recommends connecting the battery to a battery charger, to save you the trouble of having to recharge the battery. The battery charger will keep the battery charged properly and at the correct voltage levels required by the systems and devices in the car. Before using the battery charger, carefully follow the instructions provided. To connect the device to the battery, see “Battery Recharge” in “Maintenance-Free Battery” of this section. If you do not use a battery charger to prevent the battery from going dead when you are not going to use the vehicle for long periods of time, you need to check and recharge the battery at least once every three weeks (or if you travel approximately 10 miles / 16 km per day and/or 4,000 miles / 6,000 km per year). Please note that allowing the battery to go dead repeatedly can cause premature wear on the internal cells and greatly reduce their life, leading to problems 7 285 Maintenance and Care with the ignition system and other electrical/electronic systems. The Authorized Maserati Dealer is available to advise you on how to recharge you battery correctly and give you useful information on battery care and maintenance. NOTE: The Authorized Maserati Dealer can provide you with any information about the Maserati approved “Battery Charger and Conditioner”, available in the Genuine Accessories range. WARNING! The process of charging or recharging the battery produces hydrogen, a dangerous gas that can explode and cause serious injuries. When charging or recharging the battery, follow the recommended precautions at all times: 7 • always charge or recharge the battery in a well-ventilated environment; • never charge or recharge a battery that has frozen: it can explode due to hydrogen trapped inside the ice crystals; 286 • ensure that any sparks or open flames are kept well away from the battery while it is charging; • before using a charger to charge or maintain the battery charge status, carefully follow the instructions provided to ensure the charger is connected to the battery safely and correctly. Restarting the Vehicle Before restarting the vehicle after a long period of inactivity, we recommend that you carry out the following operations. • Check the tires for pressure and for any damages, cuts or cracks. If this is the case, have them replaced. • Do not dry-rub the external surface of the vehicle. • Visually inspect if there are any fluid leaks (oil, brake and clutch fluid, engine coolant etc.). • Have the engine oil and filter replaced. • Check the fluid levels in the brake system, as well as the engine coolant level. • Check the air filter and have them replaced if necessary. • Reconnect the battery after checking the charge status (refer to “Maintenance-Free Battery” in this section) and perform the initializing procedure if applicable. You can consult the paragraph “Battery Reconnection” in this chapter for further information on this subject. • With the transmission in N (Neutral), let the engine idle for several minutes. WARNING! The engine idle must be performed outdoors. Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide which is strongly toxic and potentially lethal. Maintenance and Care Battery Reconnection • Connect the battery (refer “Maintenance-Free Battery” in this section). • Unlock and lock the doors using the key fob. • Initialize the climate control system by activating the system and pressing the AUTO control as described in chapter "Air Conditioning Controls" in section 4. • Turn on the MTC and set the date and time following the instructions given in the dedicated manual. CAUTION! • Every time the battery is reconnected, wait at least 30 seconds with the ignition switch turned to RUN before starting the engine, in order to allow the electronic system that manages the motor-driven throttles to run a self-learning cycle. At the same time, you can run the date and time set up procedure for the MTC. • Every time the battery is reconnected the warning lights and flash for about 10 seconds and then go off. 7 287 Maintenance and Care 288 8 – Features and Specifications Refilling Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Fuel Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Tire Inflation Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 289 Features and Specifications Refilling Capacities Capacities and Approved Fluids NOTE: Maserati reserves the right to change or revise specifications without prior notification. Component Fuel tank (including 4.2 Gallons/16 litres of reserve) Engine (V8 Engine) Engine (V6 Engine) Quantity 21 Gallons (80 litres) 9 Quarts /8.6 litres (max) (Difference among MIN and MAX level: 1.5 Quarts /1.4 litres) 8.8 Quarts /8.3 litres (max) (Difference among MIN and MAX level: 1.1 Quarts /1 litres) Windshield and headlight washer fluid reservoir 5.3 Quarts (5 litres) 8 290 Approved Product Specifications Premium unleaded fuel with no less than 95 RON/85 MON (91 CLC or AKI). Entirely synthetic multigrade lubricants SAE 5W/40 that meet API SL/CF and ACEA A3, B3, B4 specifications. Recommended oil: Pennzoil Platinum Euro 5W-40. Mix of water and detergent fluid, in the proportions indicated on the product package. If the temperature is below –4°F (–20°C), use pure detergent fluid. Detergent fluid: Mix of CUNA NC 956-II surfactants and alcohols. Recommended fluid: Wuerth Windshield Washer Fluid with antifreeze or Arexons DP1. Features and Specifications Component Engine cooling circuit (V8 Engine) Engine cooling circuit (V6 Engine) Hydraulic power steering (*) Automatic gearbox (*) Differential Quantity 15 Quarts (14.2 litres) (for dual zone air conditioning system) 9.7 Quarts (9.2 litres) (for dual zone air conditioning system) 8 Quarts (7.6 litres) 1.4 Quarts (1.3 litres) (*) Front differential (V6 Engine) 0.47 Quarts (0.45 litres) (*) Transfer case (V6 Engine) 0.65 Quarts (0.62 litres) Braking system - Approved Product Specifications Mixture of water and coolant, proportionally 50/50%. Coolant: protective, antifreeze action and ethylene glycol-based with organic inhibitors compatible with regulations: • ASTM D 3306, ASTM D 2570 • ASTM D 4340, ASTM D 2809 • SAE J 1034 • CUNA NC 956/16 • FGA 9.55523 or equivalent. Recommended fluid: GlycoShell/GlycoShell Long Life. Recommended oil: SHELL Spirax S1 ATF TASA. Recommended oil: SHELL ATF L- 12108. Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 – FE HYPOID GEAR LUBRICANT. Recommended oil: SHELL TF 0951. Recommended oil: SHELL TF 0870. Synthetic fluid: USA FMVSS n. 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925 Class 4, JIS K 2233 Class 5, AS/NZ 1960 Class 3, SAE J1704, CUNA NC 956-01. Recommended fluid: PETRONAS Tutela Brake Fluid TOP4. 8 CAUTION! For each oil refilling and/or replacement, please contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer. 291 Features and Specifications Component Air conditioning system Quantity dual zone: 26.1 oz +/-0.7 oz (740 gr +/-20 gr) four-zone: 31.4 oz +/-0.7 oz (890 gr +/-20 gr) Approved Product Specifications Coolant: r134a. (*) No scheduled maintenance expected. CAUTION! To guarantee vehicle’s integrity and maintain performance level always use genuine parts approved and recommended by Maserati. Engine Oil Identification Symbol Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). Maserati only recommends API Certified engine oils. SAE 5W-40 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to chapter “Maintenance Procedures” in section 7. Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Damage caused by use of non-approved chemicals is not covered by the new Vehicle Limited Warranty. 8 292 Features and Specifications Fuel Consumption The fuel consumption values shown (miles per gallon) are established using EPA test guidelines. Quattroporte GTS (V8 Engine) Quattroporte S Q4 (V6 Engine) City 13 MPG 15 MPG Highway 22 MPG 24 MPG Combined 16 MPG 18 MPG CAUTION! The type of route, traffic and weather conditions, driving style, general condition of the vehicle, equipment/accessories in the vehicle, use of the air conditioning system, vehicle load and other items or situations which may negatively affect the vehicle aerodynamics or wind resistance lead to consumption ratios differing from the indicated ones. NOTE: The specifications described above can change without prior notification. 8 293 Features and Specifications Technical data Engine Data Quattroporte GTS (V8 Engine) Quattroporte S Q4 (V6 Engine) Cylinder number and position 8 - 90° V 6- 60° V Number of valves per cylinder 4 4 Bore x stroke 86.5 x 80.8 mm 86.5 x 84.5 mm Total displacement 3,799 cm3 2,979 cm3 Compression ratio 9.5 : 1 9.7 : 1 Maximum power output (EC) 390 kW – 523 HP 302 kW – 404 HP - corresponding RPM 6,700 g/min 5,500 g/min Peak torque (EC) 480 ft-lb (650 N-m) 406 ft-lb (550 N-m) - corresponding RPM 2,000 – 4,000 RPM 4,500 – 5,000 RPM (*) Overboost torque (EC) 524 ft-lb (710 N-m) 406 ft-lb (550 N-m) - corresponding RPM 2,250 – 3,500 RPM 1,750 – 5,000 RPM (*) Overboost function is available when Sport mode is selected and throttle, load and transmission parameters are reached. 8 294 Features and Specifications Properties Timing The timing system uses two overhead camshafts with timing variator. Timing system control Timing chain. Supply Over-supplied with turbocompressor and related intercooler for each bank. Injection – Ignition High pressure 2900 PSI (200 bar) direct fuel injection system. Static ignition with digital electronic control system included and controlled by a single microprocessor ECU. Transmission Brakes Suspension ZF automatic transmission with 8 gears, torque converter, lock-up clutch and anti-slip function. Sequential and traditional control type. TRANSAXLE-type transmission. Traction system equipped with rear self-locking differential. 4-wheel ventilated disc brakes. Front brake disc diameter: 15 in / 380 mm (V8 Engine), 14.2 in / 360 mm (V6 Engine). Rear brake disc diameter: 13.8 in (350 mm). The Electric Parking Brake (EPB) acts on the rear wheels. Double-wishbone independent front suspension. Multilink independent rear suspension. Skyhook adaptive damping with electronically-controlled shock absorbers. Steering Speed-sensitive hydraulic power steering with cooling system. Turning Circle = 38.7 ft (11.8 m) No. of steering wheel turns = 1.37 (to the left and right). 8 295 Features and Specifications Wheels NOTE: • Maserati recommends Maserati Genuine Tires marked with “MGT” logo specifically designed for its models. • In order to maintain high performance and safety level, Maserati recommends to use tires equivalent to the original size. WARNING! • The maximum speed reachable with the tires is indicated by the tire manufacturer. Always comply with the regulations in force in the Country you are driving in. • Never exceed the maximum speed indicated for the tires: failure to respect the max. speed may damage these tires. Danger: risk of accident! Allowed tires size with standard wheel rims Quattroporte GTS (V8 Engine) Quattroporte S Q4 (V6 Engine) Light alloy rims 20” x 8,5J (front) 20” x 10,5J (rear) 19” x 8,5J (front) 19” x 10J (rear) - Front tires 245/40 ZR 20 (99Y) XL 245/45 ZR 19 (98Y) - Rear tires 285/35 ZR 20 (100Y) 275/40 ZR 19 (101Y) - Front winter tires 245/40 ZR 20 99V XL M+S 245/45 ZR 19 98V M+S - Rear winter tires 285/35 ZR 20 100V M+S 275/40 ZR 19 101V M+S - Front all-season tires — 245/45 ZR 19 98V M+S - Rear all-season tires Light alloy spare rim 8 296 - Spare tire — 275/40 ZR 19 101V M+S 18” x 6J 18” x 6J 175/50 R 18 175/50 R 18 Features and Specifications Allowed tires size with optional wheel rims For all models Light alloy rims 19” x 8,5J (front) 19” x 10J (rear) - Front tires 245/45 ZR 19 (98Y) - Rear tires 275/40 ZR 19 (101Y) - Front winter tires 245/45 ZR 19 98V M+S - Rear winter tires Light alloy rims 275/40 ZR 19 101V M+S 20” x 8,5J (front) 20” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires 245/40 ZR 20 (99Y) XL - Rear tires 285/35 ZR 20 (100Y) - Front winter tires 245/40 ZR 20 99V XL M+S - Rear winter tires Light alloy rims 285/35 ZR 20 100V M+S 21” x 8,5J (front) 21” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires 245/35 ZR 21 (96Y) XL - Rear tires 285/30 ZR 21 (100Y) XL - Front winter tires 245/35 ZR 21 96W XL M+S - Rear winter tires 285/30 ZR 21 100W XL M+S 8 297 Features and Specifications Performance Quattroporte GTS (V8 Engine) Quattroporte S Q4 (V6 Engine) Maximum speed 191 mph (307 km/h) 176 mph (283 km/h) Accelerations from 0 to 100 km/h 4.7 seconds 4.9 seconds Weights Quattroporte GTS (V8 Engine) Quattroporte S Q4 (V6 Engine) Unladen vehicle weight (with tank and reservoirs filled, tools and accessories) 4,495 lb (°) 4,607 lb (°) Approved Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) 5,595 lb (2,643 lb front axle – 2,952 lb rear axle) 5,595 lb (2,643 lb front axle – 2,952 lb rear axle) (°) Base configuration without options. Dimensions 8 298 Wheel base 124.8 in (3,171 mm) Total length 207.2 in (5,262 mm) Width without mirrors 76.7 in (1,948 mm) Width with mirrors 82.6 in (2,100 mm) Front track 64.3 in (1,634 mm) Rear track 64.8 in (1,647 mm) Front overhang 38.1 in (968 mm) Rear overhang 44.2 in (1,123 mm) Height 58.3 in (1,481 mm) Trunk volume 18.7 cu. ft. (530 l) Features and Specifications Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure value under the following loading conditions listed in the table below: • PLC (Partial Loading Condition): considering 2 passengers + luggage. • FLC (Full Loading Condition): considering 4 or 5 passengers + luggage. (°) Speed driving higher than 124 mph (200 km/h) Load PLC FLC PLC - FLC Wheel (°°) Front and rear Front and rear Front and rear Pressure 32 PSI (2.2 bar) 38 PSI (2.6 bar) 38 PSI (2.6 bar) Spare tire pressure 51 PSI (3.5 bar) (°) Not for winter and all-season tires. (°°) All sizes. NOTE: • The pressure values indicated in the table are also reported on the driver-side door pillar information label. • For more information about the pressure check methods, see “Tires – General Information” in section 5. WARNING! • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. • Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire overheating and failure. • Over-inflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that results in tire failure. 8 • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. (Continued) 299 Features and Specifications (Continued) • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. • Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires, and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires. 8 300 9 – Index 301 Index 9 302 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 ABS (Anti Lock Brake System). . . . .203 Accessories Aftermarket Parts and Accessories Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Accident, in the event of . . . . . . . .237 AFS (Advanced Frontlighting System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Advanced Front Air Bag Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Air Bag Deployment Result . . . . .65 Air Bag Deployment Sensors and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Air Bag System Components. . . . .60 Air Bag System Maintenance . . . .65 Air Bag Warning Light. . . . . . . . .79 Front Air Bag Inflator Units . . . . .64 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Supplemental Seat-mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) . . . . . .62 Transport of persons with disability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Air Conditioning System (A/C System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 A/C System Maintenance . . . . . .278 Air Conditioning Controls . . . . .172 Air Conditioning Distribution . . .131 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Dual-zone Controls . . . . . . . . . .173 Filter Replacement . . . . . . . . . .265 Four-Zone Climate Control . . . . .177 Four-zone Controls . . . . . . . . . .177 Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Alarm, Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . .26 ALR (Automatic Locking Retractor). .57 Armrest, rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Assistance, if you need . . . . . . . .11 ATC (Automatic Temperature Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Audio Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 MTC Side Audio Controls . . . . . .160 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . .159 Audio System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .186 Automatic Transmission Controls.187 Automatic Transmission Range . .189 Drive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 Gear Shift Indicator Light . . . . . .196 I C E Mode excluding ESC . . . . . .197 Manual Release of Transmission .249 Transmission Malfunction. . . . . .197 Aux and USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 BAS (Brake Assist System) . . . . . Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery remote Posts Position . Battery Statement. . . . . . . . . Jump start Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . .204 .267 .247 .285 .246 Maintenance Free Battery . . . . .267 To disconnect the Battery . . . . . .268 To reconnect the Battery . . . . . .269 BeltAlert system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Bodywork Maintenance . . . . . . .281 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . .203 Brake and Stability Control System (ESC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . .204 Brake Fluid Level Check . . . . . . .261 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Manual Release of Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Release after Battery Disconnection. . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Using the Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .206 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Courtesy Lights (Below Door) . . .277 Front Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . .276 License Plate Lights . . . . . . . . . .277 Light Clusters Bulbs Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 Tail-Light Clusters Light Bulbs . . .276 Trunk Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 CD / DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 CD / DVD Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . .67 Index Children too large for Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Infants and Child Restraints . . . . .67 Installing Child Restraint Systems using the Vehicle Seat Belt equipped with ALR. . . . . . . . . . .69 Lower Anchors and Tether for Children (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Older Children and Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Tips on getting the most out of your child restraint . . . . . . . . .69 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Clock, analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Central Console Components/Features . . . . . . . . .83 Front Console Components . . . . .82 Instrument Panel on the Rear Central Console . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Power Outlet Inside the Central Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Front Seats Cup Holders . . . . . .116 Power Outlet Inside the Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Rear Seats Cup Holders . . . . . . .117 Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Data, Technical . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Automatic Locking Doors . . . . . .39 Child Protection Door Lock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Doors Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Doors Manual Lock. . . . . . . . . . .38 Front Doors Components . . . . . .85 Lock/Unlock Door Flashlight . . . .32 Manual Door Lock from Outside .42 Power Doors Locking/Unlocking . .38 Rear Doors Components . . . . . . .85 Unlock Doors from the Driver Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Unlock Doors from the Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Unlock Driver Door/All Doors with Remote Key 1 Press . . . . . . . . . .32 Unlock Power Doors and Trunk Lid with Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Unlock the Doors and Fuel Filler Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 “Drive Away Inhibit” strategy . . . .202 Driving Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Driving at Night . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Driving in Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Driving in the Mountains. . . . . .231 Driving in the Rain . . . . . . . . . .230 Driving on Snow or Ice . . . . . . .231 Driving through Flooded Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Safe Driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 DRL (Daytime Running Light) . . . .104 EDR (Event Data Recorder) . . . . . . .66 Electronic Cruise Control. . . . . . . .208 Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Emergency Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 First Aid Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Hazard Warning Light/Flasher . .110 In the Event of an Accident . . . .237 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 Towing a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .249 Trunk Lid Emergency Release . . . .50 Engine Engine Air Filter Replacement . .265 Engine Coolant Level Check . . . .260 Engine Lid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Engine Oil Level Check . . . . . . .263 Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . .238 Engine Start Failure . . . . . . . . .185 Engine Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . .186 Normal Starting of the Engine . .184 Use of the Engine . . . . . . . . . . .206 Engine Lid Open and Close the Engine Lid . .51 Trunk and Engine Lid Ajar Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Entertainment, Rear Seats. . . . . . .121 EPB (Electric Parking Brake). . . . . .198 9 303 Index ESC (Electronic Stability Control). . .203 Filters A/C System Air Filter Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Air Filter Replacement. . Fuel Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs . . . . . . Fuel Consumption . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . Fuel System Warnings . . . . . . . Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . Low Fuel Indicator . . . . . . . . . Materials Added to Fuel. . . . . . MMT in Gasoline. . . . . . . . . . . Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses Replacement . . . . . . . . . Integrated Power Module . . . . Rear Power Distribution Center. 9 304 .265 .265 .227 .229 .256 .293 .225 .226 .226 .155 .226 .226 .225 .271 .271 .272 .274 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 rear head restraints. . . . . . . . . . .92 HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . .130 Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . .130 HSA (Hill Start Assist) . . . . . . . . . .205 Illuminated Entry/ Exit . . . . . . . . . .28 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . .24 Infotainment System. . . . . . . . . . .157 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Interiors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Components between the Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Interior Components . . . . . . . . . .82 Interior Maintenance and Care . .283 iPod connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Jump Start Procedure . . . . . . . . . .247 Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key Fob Battery Replacement. . . Preventing Inadvertent Locking of key fob RKE Transmitter Inside the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requiring and setting Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unlock Power Doors and Trunk Lid with Key Fob. . . . . . . . . . . . Keyless Ignition Device . . . . . . . . . Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sentry Key Immobilizer System . . Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake Fluid Level Check . . . . . . Coolant Transmission and Hydraulic Steering System Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Oil Level Check. . . . . . . .23 .34 .41 .25 .33 .32 .22 .22 .24 .260 .261 .265 .260 Steering Fluid Level Check . . . . .264 Transmission Oil Check. . . . . . . .264 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Adaptive Bi-Xenon Headlights . .104 AFS Adaptive Headlights . . . . . .104 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . .103 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .275 Dimmer Controls. . . . . . . . . . . .109 Dome Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 DRL Daytime Running Lights . . .104 Entry/Exit Illumination . . . . . . . .107 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Hazard Warning Light/Flashers . .110 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Headlights On With Wipers . . . .112 Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . .103 High Beam and Flashing . . . . . .106 Integrated External Rear View Mirror Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Light Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 SmartBeam System . . . . . . . . . .104 Turn Signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Vehicle Headlights Switch Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Loading the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .122 Loading with Rear Seatbacks Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Vehicle Load Carrying Capacity . .122 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Index A/C System Maintenance . . . . . .278 Air Bag System Maintenance . . . .65 Bodywork Maintenance . . . . . .281 Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs . . . . . . .256 Interior Maintenance and Care. .283 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . .257 Periodic Maintenance . . . . . . . .255 Scheduled Maintenance Service .252 Scheduled Service Plan . . . . . . .253 Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . .126 Wheels Maintenance . . . . . . . .279 Maserati Roadside Assistance Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Messages (TFT Display) . . . . . . . . .142 MIL (Malfunction Indicator Light). .138 Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 External Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Integrated External Rear View Mirror Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Internal Rear View Mirror . . . . .100 Mirrors Positioning. . . . . . . . . . .99 Rear View Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . .99 Tilt Mirrors in Reverse . . . . . . . .100 MTC System (Maserati Touch Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Audio System. . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Auto-On Comfort and Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doors and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MTC Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . MTC Side Audio Controls . . . . . Phone/Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . Radio Operation. . . . . . . . . . . Remote Audio Controls . . . . . . Safety and Driving Assistance . . Sirius XM Setup . . . . . . . . . . . Steering Wheel Audio Controls Tools and Hard Controls . . . . . Touch Screen Keys . . . . . . . . . .163 .164 .167 .168 .166 .162 .160 .169 .160 .159 .165 .170 .159 .158 .159 On Board Diagnostic System . . . . .207 On Board Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 ORC (Occupant Restraint Controller) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Enabling and Disabling . . . . . . . .75 Park Assist Sensors . . . . . . . . . . .72 Servicing Park Assist System . . . . .75 Warning Messages Display. . . . . .73 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Deactivating Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 Failure Indication . . . . . . . . . . .201 Manual Engagement/ Disengagement . . . . . . . . . . . .199 Manual Release of Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Release after Battery Disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 ParkSense. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Park Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 ParkView (Camera) . . . . . . . . . . . .76 ParkView Rear Back Up Camera . . . .76 Passive Entry System . . . . . . . . . . .40 Pets, transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Phone and Voice Controls on Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Phone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . .181 Phone/Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Electric Power Outlet . . . . . . . .114 Power Outlet Inside the Central Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Power Outlet Inside the Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Power Outlet inside the Trunk . .115 Refillings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Refilling Capacities . . . . . . . . . .290 Remote Audio Controls . . . . . . . .159 Remote Start System . . . . . . . . . . .36 Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . .67 9 305 Index Occupant Restraint System. . . . . RKE (Remote Keyless Entry) Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pairing Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Seats Memory . . . Radio Frequency RKE Transmitter Roadside Assistance Program. . . . . 9 306 .52 .22 .90 .35 .16 Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . .67 NHTSA Toll-free Auto Safety Hotline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Occupant Restraint System. . . . . .52 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . .12 Scheduled Maintenance Service . . .252 Scheduled Service Plan . . . . . . . . .253 SD Memory Card and CD/DVD . . . .170 Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Passenger Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . .57 Seat Belts and Pregnant Women . .59 Seat Belts Pretensioners. . . . . . . .58 Three-Point Seat Belts . . . . . . . . .54 Three-Point Seat Belts Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Three-Point Seat Belts Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Three-Point Seat Belts Use Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Using the Seat Belt in Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Mode . . .57 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Comfort Luxury Rear Seats . . . . . .94 Components between the Rear Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Driver Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . .89 Easy Entry/Exit Seats . . . . . . . . . .91 Front Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . .88 Front Power Seats. . . . . . . . . . . .86 Front Seats Cup Holders . . . . . . .116 Front Ventilated Seats . . . . . . . . .89 Memory Profiles Setting . . . . . . .90 Pairing Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Seats Memory . . . .90 Power Lumbar Seats . . . . . . . . . .87 Rear Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Rear Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . .92 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Rear Seats Cup Holders . . . . . . .117 Rear Seats Entertainment. . . . . .121 Rear Side Heated Seats . . . . . . . .93 Seat Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Seat Setting Devices . . . . . . . . . .94 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 SmartBeam system . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Smoking Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Snow Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Spare parts service . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Genuine parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Scheduled maintenance. . . . . . . .13 SRS (Supplemental Restraint System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 Engine Start Failure. . . . . . . . . .185 Normal Starting of the Engine . .184 Steering Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . .97 Phone and Voice Controls on Steering Wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Stored, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 Stuck Vehicle, freeing . . . . . . . . . .245 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Closing Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . .125 Power Sunroof with Sunshade . .124 Slide Opening Sunroof. . . . . . . .125 Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . .126 Venting Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Sunshades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Power Sunshades . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Power Sunshades on Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Power Sunshades on the Rear Doors Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Danger symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Symbols of prohibitions and compulsory measures . . . . . . . . .14 TCS (Traction Control System). . . . .204 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Index Tell tales Tell tales on Rev Counter . . . . . TFT Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main and Submenu . . . . . . . . Messages on Main Display Area TFT (Thin Film Transistor) . . . . . . Tires Change a Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . Compact spare tire . . . . . . . . . Department of Transportation Uniform Tire Quality Grades. . . General Information . . . . . . . . Inflation Pressure . . . . . . . . . . Punctured Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . Snow Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire Pressure Checkup . . . . . . . Tire Pressure Low Warning. . . . TPMS Tire Pressure Monitoring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Towing Conditions. . . . TPMS System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire Pressure Low Warning. . . . TPMS Deactivation . . . . . . . . . Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position. . . . . . . . . . .140 .142 .143 .151 .142 .239 .219 .215 .211 .299 .239 .217 .219 .216 .216 .222 .220 .217 .218 .236 .249 .249 .249 .220 .222 .224 .245 Transmitter, RKE Preventing Inadvertent Locking of key fob RKE Transmitter Inside the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Radio Frequency RKE Transmitter .35 Trunk To enter the Trunk . . . . . . . . . . .42 To unlatch the Trunk. . . . . . . . . .33 Trunk Compartment Operation . .49 Trunk Lid Emergency Release from inside the Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Trunk Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Trunk Lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Trunk and Engine Lid Ajar Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Trunk Lid Emergency Release from inside the Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .18 Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 Warning icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Warning Lights Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . .79 TFT Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Warning Lights on Analog Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Warnings when driving . . . . . . . . .15 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Warranty Information. . . . . . . . .11 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Wheels Maintenance . . . . . . . .279 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Auto-Down Feature . . . . . . . . . .44 Auto-Up Feature with Anti-Pinch Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Power Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Reset Auto-Up/Down . . . . . . . . .45 Window and Sunshade Lockout Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Windshield Wipers and Washers . .111 Adding Washer, Headlight Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Headlight On with Wipers . . . . .112 Rain Sensing Wipers . . . . . . . . .112 Windshield and Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Windshield and Wiper Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . .111 Wipers Blades Maintenance . . . .112 9 307 Maserati S.p.A. & Maserati North America, Inc. reserve the right to make changes and/or modifications to the content and all technical information and specifications without prior notification. Therefore, the user is not entitled to any claims based on the contents (texts, data, illustrations, explanations and regulations) in this manual, which are based on the data known at the time of going to print. © 2014. Maserati S.p.A. All rights reserved. Publication 910040458 - 1st Edition - 10/2014 This document may not be reproduced, printed or translated, even partially, without the written consent of MASERATI S.p.A. WWW.MASERATI .COM M A S E R AT I S PA · V I A L E C I R O M E N O T T I , 3 2 2 · I - 4 1 1 2 1 M O D E N A